Home

Operating Instructions SC -LX90 O perating Instruction s

1. Surround right SR Surround left SL Surround Surround back right back left SBR SBL If the center speaker is bi amp compatible make bi amp connections to achieve high quality sound 7 2 channel speaker B connections When using only one surround back speaker connect it to the L4 Single terminals Front right R Front Front Front right R Center C left left L 38 Surround Surround gn Surround Surround left SL back right back left SBR SBL If the center speaker is bi amp compatible make bi amp connections to achieve high quality sound Automatically setting up for surround sound MCACC amp Full Band Phase Control The Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening area taking into account ambient noise speaker size and distance and tests for both channel delay and channel level After you have set up the microphone provided with your system the amplifier uses the information from a series of test tones to optimize the speaker settings and equalization for your particular room and also to calibrate the frequency phase characteristics of the speakers connected 02 Simple Home Theater Guide En Make sure you do this before moving on to Playing a source
2. Last Connected Server Single Server USB Glossary Default Gateway Default gateway is a node on a computer network that serves as an access point to another network A default gateway such as a computer and router is used to torward all traffic that is not addressed to a station within the local subnet DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server Provides a mechanism to allocate IP addresses to client hosts In most cases a broadband router serves as a DHCP server in a home network DLNA Digital Living Network Alliance The DLNA authorized logo makes it easy for consumers to recognize products that meet the new standard for home network PCs and other digital devices as set down in the DLNA Guidelines for interoperability This allows music video etc to be enjoyed from various devices over a home network This unit is compatible with music photo and video content and is based on the DLNA Home Networked Device Interoperability Guidelines v1 0 This unit can be used to playback music photos and video stored on a DLNA compatible server connected through a LAN cable Digital Living Network Alliance DLNA is dedicated to the simplitied sharing of digital content such as digital music photos and video among networked consumer electronics CE and PCs By establishing a platform of interoperability based on open industry standards DLNA delivers technical design guidelines that companies can use to develo
3. automatically selected The System Setup menu Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room equalizer for your speakers excluding the subwoofer It works by measuring the acoustic characteristics of your room and neutralizing the ambient characteristics that can color the original source material providing a flat equalization setting If you re not satisfied with the adjustment provided in Automatically setting up for surround sound MCACC amp Full Band Phase Control on page 11 or Automatic MCACCT Expert on page 40 you can also adjust these settings manually to get a frequency balance that suits your tastes 1 Select EQ Adjust from the Manual MCACC setup menu 55 0dB DVD LD 3 Manual MCACC a Fine Channel Level b Fine SP Distance c Precision Distance d Standing Wave e EQ Adjust f EQ Professional 2 Select the channel s you want and adjust to your liking 55 0dB 63Hz 0 0 SBL 125Hz 0 0 250Hz 0 0 dB 500Hz 0 0 S TkH2 lt A 0 0 0 0 0 Use the buttons to select the channel Use the buttons to select the frequency and 4 gt to boost or cut the EQ When you re finished go back to the top of the screen and use the buttons to select the next channel e The OVER indicator shows in the display if the frequency adjustment is too drastic and might distort If this happens bring
4. Creating an i LINK network Using i LINK it is possible to chain up to 17 components together so that the digital audio and control signals from each component is available to other components in the network With the addition of an i LINK repeater it s possible to connect up to 63 components LLINK connectors come in 4 pin and 6 pin configurations This amplifier uses the 4 pin connection but the two types can be mixed on a network This amplifier is compatible with i LINK Audio A amp M protocol components such as DVD players Note that when connected to i LINK MPEG II TS equipment such as a digital satellite tuner i LINK DV equipment Such as a DVD recorder or DV camcorder or an i LINK equipped personal computer audio and video signals are not transmitted and connecting to these devices sometimes causes network interruptions Check the operating instructions supplied with your other i LINK components for compatibility information This amplifier is DTCP Digital Transmission Content Protection compliant so you can play DVD A DVD Video and SACD i LINK audio Other connections When setting up an i LINK network it s important that the components form an open ended chain fig 7 or a tree fig 2 g 1 fg pa i LINK cable g 2 fig i LINK cable The system will not work if the connected components form a loop If a loop is detected the message LOOP CONNECT shows in the display Figs 8 and 4 show
5. f then ENTER The software keyboard appears on the screen Set the search condition Title Contains the following TT Cancel 5 Enter the word for search on the software keyboard then ENTER 6 Select OK on the software keyboard f then ENTER The software keyboard disappears To cancel the search select Cancel then press ENTER 7 Select OK on the Search dialog screen then ENTER The searching starts based on the word entered and search results are displayed Even while searching you can select content to play To return to the search screen press RETURN during playback 8 Press RETURN to cancel the search mode Note e Search may not be available depending on the server used Sort You can sort the items contained in the Folder or Contents List 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed 2 Select the desired folder and or content in the Media Navigator then ENTER 3 Press ADV SURR Yellow then select Sort from the Tool Menu then ENTER A Sort dialog screen appears 4 Select Bottom Up or Top Down in the Sort Order box f then ENTER Select a sorting order Title Sort Order P Cancel Tool Al 5 Select OK on the Sort dialog screen then ENTER The sorting starts based on your selection and sort results are displayed Even while
6. to select READ ID then press ENTER The LCD on the remote prompts you for the input source button you want to check 3 Press the button of the component for which you want to check the preset code then press ENTER The brand name and preset code appears in the display for three seconds Renaming input source names You can customize the names that appear on the remote LCD when you select an input source for example you could change the name of DVR 1 to HDD DVR 1 While pressing the MULTI OPERATION button press SETUP The remote LCD display shows SETUP 2 Use f to select RENAME then press ENTER The LCD on the remote prompts you for the button of the input Source you want to rename 3 Press the input source button you want to rename then press ENTER 4 Use f to select NAME EDT then press ENTER To reset the button to its original default name select NAME RST above 5 Edit the name of the input source in the remote control LCD pressing ENTER when you re finished Use B to change the character and to move forward back a position The name can be up to eight characters the possible characters are listed below ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789 space Note gt Controlling the rest of your system Direct function e Default setting ON You can use the direct function feature to control one component using the remote contro while at the same time using your amplifier t
7. CD R OPT 6 TAPE MD SACD COAX 4 TUNER PHONO iPod a With HDMI Control set to ON assignments cannot be made see HDMI Control on page 91 Note Changing the OSD display language OSD Language The language used on the on screen display can be changed 1 Set the operation selector switch to AMP then press the SETUP button An on screen display OSD appears on your TV Use the t buttons and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to confirm and exit the current menu 2 Select OSD Language from the System Setup menu DVD LD System Setup MENU 1 Auto MCACC Output Setup Manual MCACC FULL BAND PHASE CTRL Data Management Manual SP Setup Input Setup 9 Other Setup 55 0dB DVD LD 8 O0SD Language 55 0dB Language MEEI Setting Change OK O Return 3 Select the desired language e English default e French e German e Spanish e Russian e Chinese 4 Select OK to change the language DVD LD 8 O0SD Language 55 0dB Language English Setting Change iW OK f ENTER Enter O Return 5 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the System Setup menu 1 You will have to make an SR cable connection from a CONTROL OUT jack on the display to the CONTROL IN jack on this amplifier opposite from the setup in Using this amplifier with a Pioneer plasma television on page 68 Note that
8. Low frequencies High frequencies Level Acoustic Cal EQ Pro Conventional MCACC calibration range EQ calibration range Time 0 80 160 in msec Note e Reverb characteristics for different channels Reverb characteristics can be somewhat different for each channel Since this difference increases as the sound is influenced by the various room characteristics it is often better to capture a frequency analysis early on for smoother mixing of channel frequencies sounds Left Surround Right Surround Level Acoustic Cal EQ Pro Conventional MCACC calibration range EQ calibration range Time 0 80 160 in msec If your room isn t affected by the factors above it is often not necessary to make a 30 50ms setting Later time settings may provide a more detailed sound experience with your speaker system It is best to try and see what works best for your particular room Note that changing the room for example moving furniture or paintings will affect the calibration results In such cases you should recalibrate your system Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional 1 Select EQ Professional then press ENTER DVD LD 3 Manual MCACC 55 0dB DVD LD 55 0dB 3f EQ Professional 1 Reverb Measurement 2 Reverb View 3 Advanced EQ Setup a Fine Channel Level b Fine SP Distance c Precision Distance d Standing Wave e EQ Adjust Return ENTER Next Retu
9. e THX Ultra2 Music For the playback of multi channel music the THX Ultra2 Music mode should be selected In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5 1 encoded music sources such as DTS Dolby Digital and DVD Audio to provide a wide stable rear soundstage e THX Ultra2 Games For the playback of stereo and multi channel game audio the THX Ultra2 Games mode should be selected In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5 1 and 2 0 encoded game sources such as analog PCM DTS and Dolby Digital This accurately places all game audio surround information providing a full 360 degree playback environment THX Ultra2 Games mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround field THX the THX logo and Ultra2 Plus are trademarks of THX Ltd which may be registered in some jurisdictions All rights reserved All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners About Neural THX Surround Neural Surround THX Technologies draws the brain s attention to sonic details in musical instruments vocals and ambience Neural Surround THX Technologies delivers the rich envelooment and discrete image detail of surround sound in a format 100 compatible with stereo This product is manufactured under license from Neural Audio Corporation and THX Ltd Pioneer Corporation hereby grants the user a non exclusive non transferable limi
10. Connecting a component to the front panel inputs The front panel inputs comprise a composite video jack VIDEO an S Video jack S VIDEO stereo analog audio inputs AUDIO L R and an optical digital audio input DIGITAL IN You can use these connections for any kind of audio video component but they are especially convenient for portable equipment such as camcorders video games and portable audio video equipment S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R DIGITALIN a e Push down on the lower portion of the front panel door to access the front video connections i BOO Ea E E DIGITAL OUT VIDEO OUTPUT TV game video camera etc e Select these inputs using INPUT SELECT remote or the INPUT SELECTOR dial front panel to select VIDEO GAME 2 En Connecting your equipment 03 Installing your speaker system To take full advantage of the amplifier s surround sound speaker if you like it must be connected to the left capabilities connect front center surround A Surround surround back terminal The following connections B and surround back speakers as well as subwoofers example is for 9 2 channel surround connections Note Although this is ideal other configurations with fewer that miary other speaker layouts and usage patterns are speakers no subwoofer or no center speaker or even no also possible For details see Se ecting the speaker layout surround speakers will work At the very least front left
11. Dolby Digital Surround OO Pro Logic Ilx MOVIE OO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE DTS Surround Neo 6 CINEMA Neo 6 CINEMA Other stereo sources Stereo playback Stereo playback Analog sources As above ANALOG DIRECT stereo PCM sources As above PCM DIRECT stereo DVD A sources As above PCM DIRECT stereo SACD sources As above SACD DIRECT stereo Dolby Digital Surround DO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE 00 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE DTS Surround Neo 6 CINEMA Neo 6 CINEMA Other stereo sources Stereo playback Stereo playback Analog sources As above ANALOG DIRECT stereo PCM sources As above PCM DIRECT stereo DVD A sources As above PCM DIRECT stereo SACD sources As above SACD DIRECT stereo Multichannel signal formats Surround Back speaker s Input signal format DIRECT PURE DIRECT Connected Not connected Dolby Digital EX 6 1 channel flagged Dolby Digital EX OO Pro Logic Ilx MOVIE Dolby Digital EX OO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE DTS ES 6 1 channel sources 6 1 channel DTS ES Matrix Discrete DTS ES Matrix Discrete flagged DVD A sources Muti ch PCM Straight decoding PCM DIRECT SACD sources As above SACD DIRECT 5 1 channel encoding Other 5 1 6 1 7 1 channel sources As above Straight decoding DVD A sources Muti ch PCM Straight decoding PCM DIRECT SACD sources As above SACD DIRECT 5 1 channel encoding Other 5 1 6 1 7 1 channel sources As a
12. Sound is only output from Zone 2 when the speaker output terminal setting see page 43 is setto 7 2ch ZONE 2 Sound is always output from the pre out terminals So sound may be output from the subwoofer 1 When A ON is selected the sound of B is not output from the PREOUT terminal In the same way when B ON is selected the sound of A is not output from the PREOUT terminal The sound of both A and B is output from the PREOUT terminal when either A B ON or OFF is selected 07 Other connections En Switching the speaker system according to the playback environment Application Manual With the amplifier the combination of the speaker system A B selection with the surround back channel processing selection page 37 can be used to switch between the speaker configuration for high sound quality multi channel music sources DVD Audio discs SACDs etc recommended by the ITU R and a speaker system for viewing movies as recommended by THX Note that to do so you must make 9 1 channel or 9 2 channel speaker connections and set the speaker output terminal setting to Normal Setting the speaker system for high sound quality multi channel music sources DVD Audio discs and SACDs 1 Switch the speaker system Select B ON A is turned off and sound is only produced from the surround B channel speaker for listening to music 2 Switch the surround back channel Select SBch OFF The above settings allow you to enjoy h
13. The amplifier should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular use e g when on vacation Make sure the blue STANDBY ON light has gone out before unplugging 04 Controls and displays Chapter 4 Controls and displays Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 SC LX90 Q e VOLUME 12 13 1415 16 17 18 19 O ZONE2 0 A MULTI ZONE CONTROL L VIDEO GAME 2 INPUT J 1 1 SPEAKERS AUTO SURROUND O i DIRECT x T 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 1 STANDBY ON 5 ADVANCED MCACC indicator Switches the amplifier between on and standby Power Lights when one of the MCACC presets page 37 is indicator lights when the amplifier is on selected 2 INPUT SELECTOR dial 6 LCD display Use to select an input source POR o 7 LLINK indicator 3 PHASE CONTROL indicator Lights when an i LINK Audio equipped component is Lights to indicate Phase Control or Full Band Phase selected page 58 Control is selected page 14 M 8 HDMI indicator 4 Remote sensor Blinks when connecting an HDMI equipped component Receives the signals from the remote control see lights when the component is connected page 18 Operating range of remote control unit on page 31 Note 1 The MCACC indicator does not light when the MCACC preset memory currently being selected has not been corrected with Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional or when EQ is set to OFF in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu
14. for more on these decoding formats e The Auto Surround feature is canceled if you connect headphones 2 For more options using this button see Using Stream Direct on page 36 3 In modes that give 6 1 channel sound the same signal is heard from both surround back speakers 4 f surround back channel processing page 37 is switched OFF or the surround back speakers are set to NO this happens automatically if the Speaker output setting on page 43 is set to All Ch Bi Amp D0 Pro Logic IIx becomes D0 Pro Logic Il 5 2 channel sound 5 When listening to 2 channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic Ilx Music mode there are three further parameters you can adjust Center Width Dimension and Panorama See Setting the Audio options on page 99 to adjust them 6 When listening to 2 channel sources in Neo 6 Music mode you can also adjust the center image effect see Setting the Audio options on page 99 7 Neural THX can be selected when the input signal is an analog or PCM signal Listening to your system 05 e DTS ES Allows you to hear 6 1 channel playback with DTS ES encoded sources e DTS Neo 6 Allows you to hear 6 1 channel playback with DTS encoded sources Using the Home THX modes THX and Home THX are technical standards created by THX Ltd for cinema and home theater sound Home THX is designed to make home theater audio sound more like what you hear in a cinema Different THX options will be available depending on
15. press the SETUP button An on screen display OSD appears on your TV Use the T e buttons and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to confirm and exit the current menu e Press SETUP at any time to exit the System Setup menu 3 Select the setting you want to adjust DVD LD 55 0d0B System Setup MENU 2 Output Setup 3 Manual MCACC 4 FULL BAND PHASE CTRL 5 Data Management 6 Manual SP Setup 7 Input Setup 8 OSD Language 9 Other Setup Exit Note 1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the System Setup menu e Auto MCACC See Automatically setting up for surround sound MCACC amp Full Band Phase Control on page 11 for a quick and effective automatic surround setup See Automatic MCACC Expert below for a more detailed setup e Output Setup Specifies how you are using your speaker terminals see Soeaker output setting on page 43 e Manual MCACC Fine tunes your speaker settings and customize the Acoustic Calibration EQ see Manual MCACC setup on page 44 e FULL BAND PHASE CTRL Calibrates and automatically corrects the frequency phase characteristics of the speakers connected see Full Band Phase Contro on page 49 e Data Management Checks your MCACC presets and manages them through copying renaming or deleting see Data Management on page 50 Manual SP Setup Specifies the size number distance and overall balance o
16. 0 cc ees 59 Connecting the multichannel analog inputs 60 Selecting the multichannel analog inputs 60 Switching the speaker system 1 ee 61 Switching the speaker system according to the playback environment Application Manual 62 Setting the speaker system for high sound quality multi channel music sources DVD Audio disses and SACDS sha civass cada 62 Setting the speaker system for movie sources 62 Bi amping your speakers unaarne 62 Brwirmnmgyourspeak Sosnar ia a e a A 63 Connecting additional amplifierS 005 63 ICP EAOIN ESS INN 4 2 ie at e m eat oar yoaeng eee oo ca 64 Making MULTI ZONE connections 0005 64 Using the MULTI ZONE controls arrean ranie 66 COn CUNG Ai ETECO NG Peara e ene od ae a doa 67 Switching components on and off using telz VOI toge oaea duis a a Ew apt we aa aiaa 67 Using this amplifier with a Pioneer plasma television 68 Using the SR mode with a Pioneer plasma television 69 Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output 69 Advanced MCACC output using yourPC 70 08 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs Enjoying the Home Media Gallery iarna 71 Usable free media servers ces 71 PIV SOO UTC ayia tionG acexace Adnan ar AA A 71 DLNA CERTIFIED Audio Video Image Player 71 SUPPOMED TIE Tomata eeni E eaae t e deck 71 Connecting to the network through LAN interface 72 Using tnet Bear E nay or ea es Be kaka a 1o
17. 10dB as necessary Use to adjust the volume of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker When it sounds like both tones are the same volume press to confirm and continue to the next channel DVD LD 0 0dB 3a Fine Channel Level SLA 0 5dB 1 5dB SBL 9 5dB e For comparison purposes the reference speaker will change depending on which speaker you select e f you want to go back and adjust a channel simply use f to select it 4 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu Fine Speaker Distance e Default setting 3 00 m all speakers For proper sound depth and separation with your system it is necessary to add a slight bit of delay to some speakers so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 1 cm increments The following setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 52 1 Select Fine SP Distance from the Manual MCACC setup menu DVD L LD 55 00B 3 Manual MCACC DVD LD 0 0dB 3b Fine SP Distance MCACC M1 MEMORY 1 a Fine Channel Level E J EP Weg c Precision Distance d Standing Wave e EQ Adjust f EQ Professional Ref Ch L lt gt Return ENTER Next s Cancel Note 2 Adjust the distance of the left channel from the listening position 3 Se
18. 6 FULL BAND PHASE CTRL ENTER Next O Return 1 This screen is only shown if you selected ALL or Speaker System in Custom Menu from the Auto MCACC CUSTOM menu The System Setup menu The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent Surround sound from your system but it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using the System Setup menu starting on page 40 You can also choose to view the settings by selecting individual parameters from the MCACC Data Check screen e Speaker Setting The size and number of speakers you ve connected see page 52 for more on this e Channel Level The overall balance of your speaker system see page 44 or 53 for more on this e Speaker Distance The distance of your speakers trom the listening position see page 45 or 54 for more on this e Standing Wave Filter settings to control lower boomy frequencies see page 46 for more on this e Acoustic Cal EQ Adjustments to the frequency balance of your speaker system based on the acoustic characteristics of your room see page 47 for more on this e FULL BAND PHASE CTRL The original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the targeted characteristics can be displayed graphically see Ful Band Phase Control on page 49 for more on this Press ENTER after you have finished checking each screen When you re finished select RETURN to go back to the System Setup
19. Advanced Surround mode for the source currently being played back on a Pioneer DVD recorder supporting HDMI Control connected to this amplifier via HDMI For details on HDMI Control see About HDMI on page 19 w SOURCE AMP GENRE 1 Set the operation selector switch to AMP 2 Press GENRE while the source assigned to a genre is being played back The most appropriate Advanced Surround mode for the source being played back is automatically selected Note 1 This feature is available only when the source being played back is assigned to a genre When the source has no genre assigned to NO GENRE appears showing that this feature is not available e Make sure that HDMI Control is set to ON When OFF is selected CANNOT SELECT appears showing that this feature is not available see About HDMI on page 19 En The System Setup menu Chapter 6 The System Setup menu Making amplifier settings from the System Setup menu The following section shows you how to make detailed settings to specify how you re using the amplifier for example if you want to set up two speaker systems in separate rooms and also explains how to fine tune individual speaker system settings to your liking w SOURCE AMP AV AMPLIFIER 1 Switch on the amplifier and your TV Use the AV AMPLIFIER button to switch on e f headphones are connected to the amplifier disconnect them 2 Set the operation selector switch to AMP then
20. C Front left L right R E OO Mm Surround Surround left SL right SR Surround back Surround back left SBL right SBR E L Features Up to 7 2 channel playback in the main zone with playback of a different device in Zone 2 ECJ E Front Front left L right R ees Speakers used Total 9 4 front 1 center 2 surround 2 surround back Applicable listening rooms When there are two listening rooms Output Setup 7 2ch ZONE 2 7 2 channel speaker B connections Subwoofer Speaker B 2 Luce Speaker B m i Front Center C Front left L right R maz left SL right SR Surround back Surround back Surround Surround left SBL right SBR m Features Up to 7 2 channel playback in the normal listening room plus stereo playback of the same sound in another room for example a kitchen Furthermore different front speakers can be used for movies multi channel playback and music stereo playback Speakers used Total 9 4 front 1 center 2 surround 2 surround back Applicable listening rooms When there is a main listening room a kitchen etc Output Setup 7 2ch Speaker B Note Positioning and connecting the speakers For the speaker layout refer to Se ecting the speaker layout usage pattern on page 9 We recommend positioning the speakers before connecting them Use one of the five connection examples below according to the speaker layo
21. Delete from My Playlist from the Tool Menu then ENTER A dialog screen appears 4 Select OK then ENTER The dialog screen disappears and the selected content is deleted from My Playlist To cancel select Cancel then ENTER Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs CH Playing displaying files from My Playlist 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed 2 Select My Playlist then ENTER 3 Select the desired Playlist from Movie Playlist Music Playlist or Photo Playlist 4 Select the desired Playlist List then ENTER 5 Select the desired content t then ENTER The selected content is played or displayed To return to the previous screen press RETURN Switching the server When one or more servers are connected within the network you can switch between servers 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed 2 Select Media Navigator then ENTER The previous server is selected 3 Press ADV SURR Yellow to open the Tool Menu 4 Choose Select Server then ENTER The Server List is displayed Pressing RETURN changes the screen to the Home Media Gallery 5 Select the desired server then ENTER The screen changes to Media Navigator on the selected server Note e The Home Media Gallery can memorize previously connected servers When the Media Navigator i
22. En For other details see Listening modes with different input signal formats on page 141 If the display does not correspond to the input signal and listening mode check the connections and settings 4 Use the volume control to adjust the volume level Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is coming from the speakers connected to this amplifier Better sound using Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control This amplifier is equipped with the two types of functions that correct phase distortion and group delay Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control Activating Full Band Phase Control is strongly recommended because it also involves the effects of Phase Control For details on each of these two features refer to the following explanations Using Phase Control During multichannel playback LFE Low Frequency Effects signals as well as low frequency signals in each channel are assigned to the subwoofer or other the subwoofer and the most appropriate speaker At least in theory however this type of processing involves a group delay that varies with frequency resulting in phase distortion where the low frequency sound is delayed or muffled by the conflict with other channels With the Phase Control mode switched on this amplifier can reproduce powerful bass sound without deteriorating the quality of the original sound see illustration below Phase Control OFF Front speaker Listening al A position a ee
23. Home Media Gallery FIRMWARE No updates are possible on USB Check if the device is Mass Storage Class compliant if it is connected properly nothing is damaged power unit mode such as Mass Storage mode and media format etc if it contains the supported files and if the speed of the device is sufficient poor device speed may result in interrupted or delayed display of images due to a bit rate problem When using a digital camera that is not Mass Storage Class compliant insert the Flash Memory card into the multi card reader e Confirm that the device is correctly inserted or removed e Check that the firmware file has been correctly downloaded Also check the file size e See the Pioneer website http www pioneer eu for details Home Media Gallery USB USB devices are not properly e Check if the device is Mass Storage Class compliant if it is connected properly nothing is damaged recognized power unit mode such as Mass Storage mode and media format etc if it contains the supported files and if the speed of the device is sufficient poor device speed may result in interrupted or delayed display of images due to a bit rate problem When using a digital camera that is not Mass Storage Class compliant insert the Flash Memory card into the multi card reader e Confirm that the device is correctly inserted or removed e No USB hub is supported When you connect a home network connect directly to the device s USB port Image o
24. a You must cause the moditied files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the Tiles and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License Additional information c Ifthe modified program normally reads commands interactively when run you must cause it when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty or else saying that you provide a warranty and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions and telling the user how to view a copy of this License Exception if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program the distribution of the whole must be
25. and just connect the audio analog and or digital to this amplifier 1 The 3 ringed SR cable from Pioneer is commercially available under the part number ADE7095 Contact the Pioneer Customer Support division for more information on obtaining an SR cable you can also use a commercially available 3 ringed mini phone plug for the connection 2 This amplifier is compatible with all SR equipped Pioneer plasma televisions from 2003 onward Other connections Using the SR mode with a Pioneer plasma television When connected using an SR cable a number of features become available to make using this amplifier with your Pioneer plasma television even easier These features include e On screen displays when making amplifier settings such as speaker setup MCACC setup and so on e On screen volume display e On screen display of listening mode e Automatic video input switching on the plasma television e Automatic volume muting on the plasma television See also SR Setup for Pioneer plasma televisions on page 97 for more on setting up the amplifier A Important e The SR features do not work when any of the iPod or HOME MEDIA GALLERY function is selected TV SOURCE AMP SR 1 Make sure that the plasma television and this amplifier are switched on and that they are connected with the SR cable See Using this amplifier with a Pioneer plasma television on page 68 for more on connecting these components e Make sure
26. ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair work Power Symptom Remedy The power does not turn on e Make sure that the power cable is plugged in to an active power outlet e Try disconnecting trom the power outlet then plugging back in The amplifier suddenly switches Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel or another set of wires If off or the Phase Control indicator so re attach the speaker wires making sure there are no stray strands blinks e The amplifier may have a serious problem Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized independent service company During loud playback the power Turn down the volume suddenly switches off e Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on page 44 e Switch on the digital safety feature While holding down the SETUP button on the front panel press STANDBY ON to set this amplifier to the standby mode Use tY to select DIGITAL SAFETY OFF and then use to select 1 or 2 select D SAFETY OFF to deactivate this feature If the power switches off even with 2 switched on turn down the volume With 1 or 2 on some features may be unavailable The unit does not respond when Try switching the amplifier off then back on again the buttons are pressed e Try disconnecting the power cable then connect again AMP ERR blinks in the display e The amplifie
27. ce 2 Assign the i LINK component to the input you want then make any necessary output settings on the component See The nout Setup menu on page 94 to assign the component to an input function on this amplifier Follow the operating instructions that came with the component to make any necessary output settings e You can connect several components together using LLINK See Creating an i LINK network below Checking the i LINK inputs If you have several i LINK equipped components and have assigned them to input functions in 7he nout Setup menu on page 94 you can confirm the settings you made below 1 Select i LINK Check from the Other Setup menu and press ENTER See he Other Setup menu on page 96 for more on navigating this menu screen e If no i LINK equipped components are connected i LINK Check cannot be selected 55 0dB 55 0dB DVD LD 9f i LINK Check 1 2 DVD LD 9 Other Setup a Multi Ch In Setup b ZONE Video Setup DV 868AVi DV 868AVi DV S 858Ai c ZONE Audio Setup d SR Setup e HDMI Control Setup g Display Image 1 2 1 2 DV S858Ai DV 757Ai RECEIVER 1 Return 2 Scroll through the list to confirm your settings When a number of i LINK equipped components are connected to your amplifier the i LINK equipped component you are looking for might be listed on additional display screens e i LINK is displayed after unassigned device names e g DV 79AVi i LINK e
28. connections that form a loop fig 3 Pa i LINK cable gt q L fig 4 A i LINK cable xE Another consideration when connecting i LINK devices is the speed of the interface At present there are three speeds S100 slowest S200 and S400 fastest This amplifier uses the S400 type Although you can use components with different speeds together we recommend connecting slower speed components at the edge of the network if possible shown by the shaded boxes in figs 1 and 2 This will keep the network free of bottlenecks When used within an i LINK network this amplifier must be on for the i LINK connection to be maintained Other components in the network may or may not maintain the connection in standby none will when the power is completely off check the operating instructions supplied with individual components Note that the audio may be momentarily interrupted if a component in the i LINK network is switched on off or its i LINK connection is switched on off This product complies with the following i LINK interface specifications Note 1 IEEE Std 1394a 2000 Standard for a High Performance Serial Bus 2 Audio and Music Data Transmission Protocol 2 0 Following the standard for AM amp 24 sequence adaptation layers the product is compatible with EC60958 bitstream DVD A and SACD Connecting the multichannel analog inputs For DVD Audio and SACD playback your DVD player may have 5 1 6 1 or 7 1 channel a
29. e gt 0 3 1 2 m Surround speakers between 30 cm and 1 2 m apart e 1 2 m lt Surround speakers more than 1 2 m apart 6 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu 07 Other connections En Chapter 7 Other connections Caution e Make sure the power is switched off before making or changing the connections Connecting an iPod This amplifier has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow you to control playback of audio content from your iPod using the controls of this amplifier If Error 13 is displayed when this amplifier is connected to an iPod and the input is set to the iPod this amplifier s iPod operation mode must be switched To do so follow the procedure at Switching the iPod operation mode on page 58 and switch to Type 2 The iPod can now be operated from this amplifier Connecting your iPod to the amplifier e P Pi y pai p a ma on sr a Amm 400 400 IN NA NE IND IN NG HDMI CTRL ouT2 OUT OUT i n mA mA IN 5 a ton P o i m 8 232 we So 232 RFIN ne ee aa a aeaea COAXIAL SEL nE oo ZONE outi gm N recse MAN REC SEL ld DVD LD OUT OUT OUT a B 0 For LD INE TAPE pve N Tv NA WE MD VERa cami wie NE DIA A A aE MME a 2 3 x VCR 4 ne OP nE OP GAME LAN 10 100 ap 1 3 na 2 gt 4 MD D OPTICAL ma 2 3 L R iPod control cable Control Dock for iPod 1 Set this amplifie
30. f a connected devices cannot output playback a source using the i LINK connection is displayed after the input device name e g DV 79AVi Non compatible devices cannot be assigned to inputs e When the cables for an assigned input device become loose or the power is cut to the device an asterisk appears before the device name e g DV 79AVi CD 3 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Other Setup menu About i LINK i LINK is a trademark name for IEEE1394 a high speed interface for digital audio video and other data found on personal computers digital camcorders and other kinds of audio and audio visual equipment A single i LINK connector can both send and receive data at the same time so only one cable is required to connect components for two way communication LLINK and the i LINK logo are trademarks of Sony Corporation About PQLS rate control Pioneer s PQLS Precision Quartz Lock System technology provides high precision digital audio trom DVD A SACD and audio CD sources when you use the i LINK interface A precision quartz controller in this amplifier eliminates distortion caused by timing errors jitter giving you the best possible digital to analog conversion from the digital source To take advantage of PQLS you must have a player compatible with rate control and it must be switched on and connected to this amplifier through the i LINK network
31. output from the subwoofer is not directional and there is no need to adjust the height Normally the subwoofer is placed on the floor Put it in a position at which it will not cancel out the bass sound output from the other speakers Also note that placing it near a wall may result in sympathetic vibrations with the building that could excessively amplify the bass sound If the Subwoofer must be installed near a wall place it at an angle so that it is not parallel to the wall surface This can help reduce any sympathetic vibrations but depending on the shape of the room this could result in standing waves However even if standing waves are generated their influence on the sound quality can be prevented using the Auto MCACC s standing wave control function page 46 OF tip e Setting the subwoofer with the line connecting the woofer middle and low frequency reproduction units sections of the center and front speakers parallel to the subwoofer s front surface achieves a more natural powerful bass sound ue 4 SW2 gang Set the DN parallel to the connecting line Note that it will be too close if it is placed directly on the line EE Additional information Step 5 Default settings with the Auto MCACC Setup auto sound field correction function It is more effective to perform the Auto MCACC Setup page 11 and Precision Distance page 45 procedure once the adjustments described above have been complet
32. see Setting the Audio options on page 99 En Controls and displays 9 MASTER VOLUME dial 10 ACTIVE MONITOR indicator The indicators of the speaker terminals compatible with sound output are lit 11 Front panel controls To access the front panel controls push gently on the lower third portion of the panel with your finger 12 MULTI ZONE CONTROL If you ve made MULTI ZONE connections see MULTI ZONE listening on page 64 use these controls to control the sub zone from the main zone see Using the MULTI ZONE contro s on page 66 13 AUDIO PARAMETER Use to access the Audio options page 99 14 VIDEO PARAMETER Use to access the Video options page 101 15 ENTER Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround sound system see page 40 16 STATUS Information on the currently selected and set functions the input signal etc is displayed on the LCD page 104 17 LCD VIEW The information shown on the LCD can be switched in three steps page 103 18 DIMMER Dims or brightens the LCD display page 103 19 USB interface Connect a USB audio device for playback page 73 20 SPEAKERS Use to change the speaker system page 61 21 AUTO SURROUND STREAM DIRECT Press to select Auto Surround page 34 or Stream Direct page 36 listening 22 PHONES jack Use to connect headphones When the headphones are connected there is no sound output from the speakers 23 MCACC SETUP MIC jack
33. to see which you like ADV SURR e Press ADV SURR repeatedly to select a listening mode e ACTION Designed for action movies with dynamic soundtracks e DRAMA Designed for movies with lots of dialog e SCI FI Designed for science fiction with lots of special effects MONOFILM Creates surround sound from mono soundtracks ENTERTAINMENT SHOW Suitable for musical sources EXPANDED THEATER Creates an extra wide stereo field TV SURROUND Provides surround sound for both mono and stereo IV sources ADVANCED GAME Suitable for video games e SPORTS Suitable for sports programs CLASSICAL Gives a large concert hall type sound ROCK POP Creates a live concert sound for rock and or pop music UNPLUGGED Suitable for acoustic music sources EXTENDED STEREO Gives multichannel sound to a stereo source using all of your speakers PHONES SURROUND When listening through headphones you can still get the effect of overall surround Tip e When an Advanced Surround listening mode is selected the effect level can be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in Setting the Audio options on page 99 1 If you only have one surround back speaker connected THX Ultra2 GAMES is not available e You can t use the THX modes when headphones are connected 2 e Depending on the source and the sound mode you have selected you may not get sound from the surround back speakers in your setup For more
34. 6 1 7 1 channel Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD except for 176 4 kHz 192 kHz 5 1 channel Dolby TrueHD 176 4 kHz 192 kHz 5 1 channel DTS EXPRESS DTS HD DTS HD Master Audio WMA9 Pro 88 2 kHz 96 kHz 5 1 channel Dolby Digital EX 6 1 channel flagged DTS ES 6 1 channel sources 6 1 channel flagged Standard Straight decoding Dolby Digital EX OO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE OO Pro Logic Ilx MUSIC Straight decoding Straight decoding Dolby Digital EX OO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE DO Pro Logic Ilx MUSIC DTS ES Matrix Discrete DTS D00 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE DTS 00 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC THX THX CINEMA THX MUSIC THX GAMES THX SURROUND EX OO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE THX THX Ultra2 CINEMA THX Ultra2 MUSIC THX Ultra2 GAMES OO Pro Logic Ilx MUSIC THX D0 EX THX GAMES THX CINEMA THX Ultra2 CINEMA THX Ultra2 MUSIC THX Ultra2 GAMES THX MUSIC THX GAMES THX CINEMA THX Ultra2 CINEMA THX Ultra2 MUSIC THX Ultra2 GAMES THX MUSIC THX GAMES THX SURROUND EX o0 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE THX THX Ultra2 CINEMA THX Ultra2 MUSIC THX Ultra2 GAMES OO Pro Logic Ilx MUSIC THX D0 EX THX GAMES DTS ES Matrix THX CINEMA DTS ES Discrete THX CINEMA DTS D0 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE THX THX Ultra2 CINEMA THX Ultra2 MUSIC THX Ultra2 GAMES DTS ES Matrix THX MUSIC DTS ES Matrix THX GAMES DTS ES Discrete THX MUSIC DTS ES Discrete THX GAMES Auto
35. DTS HD Master Audio delivers audio signals to listeners without any loss of data with its high transfer rates Additional information CH THX certified design This amplifier is THX Ultra2 certified allowing you to take advantage of new THX technologies such as ASA Advanced Speaker Array which can process any 5 1 channel source for 6 1 channel THX Surround EX or 7 1 channel THX Ultra2 CINEMA THX Ultra2 MUSIC and THX Ultra2 GAMES playback These features are also available when using the i LINK interface e HDMI and digital video conversion This amplifier is compatible with the HDMI digital video format HDMI Version 1 3a providing you with high definition digital video audio via a single cable High quality sound formats such as DIS HD and Dolby TrueHD are supported while this amplifier is also compatible with the DeepColor and x v Color feature x v Color is trademarks of Sony Corporation You can operate this amplifier in synchronization with your Pioneer component that supports the HDMI Control function by connecting your component to this amplifier via HDMI Also the built in digital video converter of this amplifier makes both de interlacing and up scaling possible and analog video signals being input are converted and output as digital video signals at the HDMI terminal e i LINK digital interface The i LINK interface makes it possible to connect this amplifier to i _LINK equipped components allowing you to enjo
36. Graphics Inc THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INCIDENTAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright C 1995 2004 Jean loup Gailly and Mark Adler Copyright c 1998 2003 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org Linux Source Notice The Pioneer Plasma Television is powered by utilizing the Linux operating system The machine readable copy of the corresponding source code is available for the cost of distribution To obtain a copy please visit http www pioneerelectronics com for more information GNU General Public License Version 2 June 1991 Copyright C 1989 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed EE Additional information En Preamb
37. Level Test Tone c Speaker Distance 55 0dB lt AUTO gt d X Curve e THX Audio Setting ENTER Next Return Return 2 Selecta setup option e MANUAL Move the test tone manually from speaker to speaker and adjust individual channel levels Note e AUTO Adjust channel levels as the test tone moves trom speaker to speaker automatically 3 Confirm your selected setup option The test tones will start after you press ENTER DVD LD 6b Channel Level 20 0dB Please Wait 20 CAUTION Loud test tones will be output s Cancel 4 Adjust the level of each channel using the buttons If you selected MANUAL use f to switch speakers The AUTO setup will output test tones in the order shown on screen DVD LD 0 0dB 6b Channel Level MCACC M1 MEMORY 1 EE SBR 10 0 dB 1 A 10 00dB SLA 9 B 10 0 dB SW1 1 sw2 1 Finish Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is emitted 5 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu Tip e The channel level can be changed at any time Set the operation selector switch to AMP then press CH LEVEL on the remote control and then use to adjust the level 1 If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS for the subwoofer This may not however yield the best bass results Dep
38. OSD Language 9 Other Setup Exit 4 Select the input function that you want to set up The default names correspond with the names next to the terminals on the rear panel such as DVD LD or VIDEO GAME 1 which in turn correspond with the names on the remote control DVD LD 7 Input Setup 7 Input Setup Input lt a Back Digital In HDMI Input Input 1 Component In Comp 3 DVD LD Input Name lt gt 12VTriggerl OFF 12V Trigger2 12V Trigger3 S Video In Input 1 i LINK n DV S 969AVi RF Input OFF v Next Finish 12V Trigger4 O0 PDP In SR Input 1 ENTER Next Finish Note 5 Select the input s to which you ve connected your component For example if your DVD player only has an optical output you will need to change the DVD LD input function s Digital In setting from COAX 1 default to the optical input you ve connected it to The numbering OPT1 to 6 corresponds with the numbers beside the inputs on the back of the amplifier e f you change the setting to an input that has been previously assigned to another function for example TV then the setting for that function will automatically be switched off If your component is connected via a component video cable to an input terminal other than the default you must tell the amplifier which input terminal your component is connected to or else you may see the S Video or composite video signals instead of
39. Play status Key guide Progress bar O CON AOU PWN Audio mode icon 10 A B repeat mode icon 11 Repeat mode icon 12 Random mode icon appears when the mode is valid Movie Player key guide Button s Function ENTER Pauses while playback or plays back while in PAUSE Fast reverse during playback or when in PAUSE Each press toggles the reverse speed among x 2 x 4 x 8 x 20 x 50 and x 100 or the slow mode speed among x 1 2 x 1 4 x 1 8 and x 1 16 When the beginning of the content is reached it pauses Fast forward while playback or PAUSE Each press toggles the forward speed among x 2 x 4 x 8 x 20 x 50 and x 100 or the slow mode speed among x 1 16 x 1 8 x 1 4 and x 1 2 When the end of the content is reached it pauses t Skips 15 seconds backward and plays back or pauses while in PAUSE 4 Skips 15 seconds forward and plays back or pauses while in PAUSE gt Plays back the content lI Pauses the playback m Stops the Player and returns to the previous screen List Thumbnail Thumbnail List gt gt Same as only fast forward function while in the slow mode Button s Function lt lt Same as only fast reverse function while in the slow mode AUTO DIRECT Sets A B repeat mode Sets the desired point A to Blue start and B to end during playback To cancel the mode press AUTO DIRECT Blue on the remote control STEREO Every press toggles the repeat mode among No F S SURR Red
40. Repeat and Repeat Once or among No Repeat Repeat Once and Repeat All while in Playlist STANDARD Available only in Playlist or Consecutive Playback Green mode Every press toggles the random mode between Random Off and Random On ADV SURR Switches the Tool Menu display on and off Even if Yellow the Tool Menu is displayed while content is played back a movie is kept playing but the time counter and progress bar do not function DISP Displays the Player status at the bottom of the screen while a movie is played back Another press of the key displays a key guide as well Pressing the key once more cancels all the information display AUDIO Every press of the key toggles the audio mode amongL R LandR RETURN Same function as i VOL VOL Adjusts the sound volume MUTE Mutes the sound Play modes TimeSearch Tool Menu Plays back the selected content from the time preset on the Movie Player Slow Tool Menu Plays back the content in slow mode on Playback the Movie Player Add toMy Tool Menu Adds the selected content to My Playlist Playlist List Stop Movie W RETURN Stops the Movie Player Player Fast See the key guide table Forward lt lt gt gt Fast Reverse Forward t t See the key guide table Reverse 15 sec Play ENTER See the key guide table gt A B Repeat AUTO See the key guide table Mode DIRECT Blue Repeat STEREO See the key guide table Mode F S SURR Red Random STANDARD See
41. SELECT selected sub zone Input Use to select the input source directly this may not source work for some functions in the currently selected sub buttons zone VOL Use to set the listening volume in the currently selected sub zone Connecting an IR receiver If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or shelving unit or you wish to use the sub zone remote control in another zone you can use an optional IR receiver such as a Niles or Xantech unit to control your system instead of the remote sensor on the front panel of this amplifier 1 Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR IN jack on the rear of this amplifier Closete or shelving unit Non Pioneer component Pioneer component Note 2 Connect the IR IN jack of another component to the IR OUT jack on the rear of this amplifier to link it to the IR receiver Please see the manual supplied with your IR receiver for the type of cable necessary for the connection e f you want to link a Pioneer component to the IR receiver see Operating other Pioneer components with this unit s sensor on page 111 to connect to the CONTROL jacks instead of the IR OUT jack Switching components on and off using the 12 volt trigger You can connect components in your system such as a screen or projector to this amplifier so that they switch on or off using 12 volt triggers when you select an input function However you must specify which inpu
42. SOURCE atid VIDEO NT PARAMETER PARAMETER ZONE2 3 MULT OPERATION TOH 0 STATUS CH LEVEL INPUT SELECT C gt MENU AROS BEROA STANDARD ADV SURR SIGNAL SEL SLEEP DIMMER AUDIO QJ SR SBch PHASE iPod CTRL 4 Es L6 A ATT GENRE HDMIOUT aS 9 CLR_ MCACC Ce 0 ba component repeat steps 4 and 5 To program signals for another component exit and repeat steps 1 through 5 Note 1 e You can t assign the TUNER iPod or HOME MEDIA GALLERY buttons 7 Press and hold the MULTI OPERATION button for a couple of seconds to exit and store the operation s Erasing one of the remote control button settings This erases one of the buttons you have programmed and restores the button to the factory default 1 While pressing the MULTI OPERATION button press SETUP The remote LCD display shows SETUP 2 Use f to select ERASE then press ENTER The LCD on the remote prompts you for the component corresponding to the button setting to be erased 3 Press the input source button corresponding to the command to be erased then press ENTER The LCD display flashes PRES KEY 4 Press and hold the button to be erased for two seconds The LCD display shows OK or NO CODE to confirm the button has been erased 5 Repeat step 4 to erase other buttons 6 Press and hold the MULTI OPERATION button for a couple of seconds when you re done Resetting the remote control presets This will erase
43. Su bwoofer 1 I i I N r ra ka Peg Sound muffled due to a delay in time Sound source e Rhythms blurred and difficult to hear e Bass sound with loss of depth e Sound of musical instruments with no reality Note Phase Control ON Front speaker Listening iw position B Ze gt i eel f bs Original sound 7 preserved with no loss of clarity e Rhythms with crystal like clarity sua Ml source Subwoofer e Bass sound with no loss of depth e Sound of musical instruments with superb reality Phase Control technology provides coherent sound reproduction through the use of phase matching for an optimal sound image at your listening position The default setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase Control switched on for all sound sources TV SOURCE AMP PHASE e Set the operation selector switch to AMP then press PHASE PHASE CONTROL to select PHASE CONTROL The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front panel lights Using Full Band Phase Control The Full Band Phase Control feature calibrates the trequency phase characteristics of the speakers connected Standard speakers designed exclusively for audio use generally reproduce sound with the divided frequency bands output from a speaker system consisting of multiple speakers in case of typical 3 way speakers for instance the tweeter the squawker midrange and the woofer output sound in the high
44. VIDEO INPUT is set to something other than OFF can be set With HDMI inputs it is not possible to display external images on the LCD screen To do so connect to this amplifiers video input using an analog video cable Dimming the display You can choose between four brightness levels for the front LCD display Note that when selecting sources the display automatically brightens for a few seconds ry SOURCE ayp DIMMER e Set the operation selector switch to AMP then press DIMMER repeatedly to change the brightness of the front LCD display Switching the HDMI output Set which terminal to use when outputting video and audio signals from the HDMI output terminals HDMI OUT1 or HDMI OUT2 The HDMI OUT1 terminal is compatible with the HDMI control function e Set the operation selector switch to AMP then press HDMI OUT Please wait a while when Please wait is displayed No operations other than switching the power between standby or on can be performed at this time The output switches between HDMI OUT1 and HDMI OUT each time the button is pressed 1 The attenuator isn t available with digital sources or when using the Stream Direct modes 2 You can also switch off the sleep timer simply by switching off the amplifier 3 Depending on the settings of the video adjustment function page 101 the external image may not appear on the LCD 4 e Synchronized amp mode on page 92 is canceled when the HDMI output is switch
45. VOL Adjust the TV volume Cable TV Satellite TV TV MUTE Mute the volume Cable TV Satellite TV TV SOURCE Switches the TV or CATV between Cable TV Satellite standby and on TV TV EE Use to choose the A commands Satellite TV on a Satellite TV menu aa Use to choose the RED B commands on a Satellite TV TV menu p Use to choose the CYAN E commands on a Satellite TV TV menu lI Use to choose the GREEN C commands on a Satellite TV TV menu Use to choose the YELLOW D commands on a Satellite TV TV menu Satellite TV TV Satellite TV TV Satellite TV TV Satellite TV TV Note Button s Function Components AUDIO Use to switch audio tracks Satellite TV TV DISP Use to display the channel Cable TV Satellite information TVAV RETURN Use to select RETURN or EXIT Satellite TV TV Number Use to select a specific TV Cable TV Satellite buttons channel TV TV 10 button Use to add a decimal point when Satellite TV TV selecting a specific TV channel ENTER Use to enter a channel Cable TV Satellite TV TV MENU Select the menu screen Cable TV Satellite TV TV t Press to select or adjust and Cable TV Satellite amp ENTER navigate items on the menu TV TV Screen Controls for other components This remote control can control these components after entering the proper codes or teaching the amplifier the commands see Setting the remote to contro other components on page 106 for more on this Set t
46. With 5 1 encoded sources a surround back page 50 to check and manage your current settings channel will be generated but the material may sound better in the 5 1 format for which it was originally encoded in which case you can simply switch surround Choosing the input Signal back channel processing off On this amplifier it is possible to switch the input signals The table below indicates when you will hear the surround back channel when playing various kinds of sources Sound plays through surround back speaker s for the different inputs as described below TV SOURCE AMP SIGNAL SEL w SOURCE AMP SBch 1 Set the operation selector switch to AMP 2 Press SIGNAL SEL SIGNAL SELECT to select the input signal corresponding to the source component Each press cycles through the options as follows e AUTO This is the default setting The amplifier selects the first available signal in the following order HDMI OO RF DIGITAL ANALOG e ANALOG Selects an analog signal e DIGITAL Selects an optical or coaxial digital signal Note 1 Different presets might also have separate calibration settings for the same listening position depending on how you re using your system These presets can be set in Automatically setting up for surround sound MCACC amp Full Band Phase Control on page 11 or Automatic MCACC Expert on page 40 either of which you should have already completed 2 e These settings have no effect wh
47. You can start a slideshow by pressing gt on the Thumbnail screen All Photos 4 Press ENTER or gt to start a slideshow The slideshow starts and photo images in the folder automatically display one by one See Setting up the slideshow on page 82 for setting up the interval time To display a key guide press DISP To display the next image content manually press or gt To display the previous image content manually press 4 orf 5 Press ENTER or Il to stop the slideshow The Photo Player goes into PAUSE 6 Press ENTER again to resume the slideshow To cancel the slideshow and stop the Photo Player press RETURN or during the playback The previous screen returns Note e When you press 4 lt gt while photo content is displayed the Photo Player goes into PAUSE Rotating the image 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed 2 Select photo content in the Media Navigator USB device or My Playlist then ENTER The photo content is displayed in full screen To stop the slideshow press ENTER again 3 Press ENTER or gt to start a slideshow The slideshow starts and photo images in the folder automatically display one by one To display a key guide press DISP 4 While using Photo Player press AUTO DIRECT Blue to rotate a photo The displayed image rotates by one quarter clockwise Each time AUTO DIRECT Blue is pressed the image
48. amplifier has been designed with the easiest possible setup in mind However before proceeding to the quick setup guide given below you have to decide the purpose of your speaker system and hook up your system for Surround sound After the following quick setup you can simply leave the amplifier in the default settings in most cases e Be sure to complete all connections before connecting this unit to an AC power source 1 Select the speaker usage method See Selecting the speaker layout usage pattern on page 9 2 Connect your speakers and place them for optimum surround sound Connect your speakers as shown in Positioning and connecting the speakers on page 10 3 Connect your TV and DVD player See Connecting your TV and DVD player on page 20 to do this For surround sound you ll want to hook up using a digital connection from the DVD player to the amplifier 4 Plug in the amplifier and switch it on followed by your DVD player your subwoofer and the TV Plug the power cable into the AC outlet and switch on the amplifier Make sure you ve set the video input on your TV to this amplifier Check the manual that came with the TV if you don t know how to do this e Set the subwoofer volume to a comfortable level Note 5 Use the on screen Auto MCACC Setup to set up your system See Automatically setting up for surround sound MCACC amp Full Band Phase Control on page 11 for more on this 6 Play a DVD and adjust th
49. and if the work is an executable linked with the Library with the complete machine readable work that uses the Library as object code and or source code so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions b Usea suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library A suitable mechanism is one that 1 uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user s computer system rather than copying library functions into the executable and 2 will operate properly with a modified version of the library if the user installs one as long as the modified version is interface compatible with the version that the work was made with c Accompany the work with a written offer valid for at least three years to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a above for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution d If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place e Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy Additional information For an executab
50. batteries together e Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries properly according to the marks in the battery case Batteries with the same shape may have different voltages Do not use different batteries together e When disposing of used batteries please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instruction s rules that apply in your country or area e WARNING Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place such as inside a car or near a heater This can cause batteries to leak overheat explode or catch fire It can also reduce the life or performance of batteries 02 Simple Home Theater Guide En Chapter 2 Simple Home Theater Guide Introduction to home theater Home theater refers to the use of multiple audio tracks to create a surround sound effect making you feel like you re in the middle of the action or concert The surround sound you get from a home theater system depends not only on your speaker setup but also on the source and the sound settings of the amplifier This amplifier will automatically decode multichannel Dolby Digital DTS or Dolby Surround sources according to your speaker setup In most cases you won t have to make changes for realistic Surround sound but other possibilities like listening to a CD with multichannel surround sound are explained in Listening to your system on page 34 Listening to Surround Sound This
51. buttons to select and set either Music or Videos then press ENTER 2 Use the t J buttons to select a category then press ENTER to browse that category e To return to the previous level press RETURN 3 Use the f buttons to browse the selected category e g albums e Use amp to move to previous next levels Note 4 Continue browsing until you arrive at what you want to play then press gt to start playback Navigation through audio categories on your iPod looks like this Playlists Songs Artists gt Albums Songs Albums Songs Songs Podcasts Genres Artists gt Albums Songs Composers gt Albums Songs Audiobooks Shuffle Songs tip e You can play all of the songs or videos in a particular category by selecting the All item at the top of each category list For example you can play all the songs by a particular artist Basic playback controls The following table shows the basic playback controls for your iPod Button What it does gt Press to start playback If you start playback when something other than asong is selected all the songs that fall into that category will play lI Pauses playback or restarts playback when paused q gt Press and hold during playback to start scanning lt lt gt P gt Press to skip to previous next song Press repeatedly to switch among Repeat One Repeat All and Repeat Off gt e Press repeatedly to switch among Shuff
52. can cause severe electrical shock Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time for example when on vacation D3 4 2 2 1a_A_En Operating Environment Operating environment temperature and humidity 5 C to 35 C 41 F to 95 F less than 85 WRH cooling vents not blocked Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight or strong artificial light D3 4 2 1 7 _A_En European model only CAUTION The OSTANDBY ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power trom the AC outlet Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect device for the unit you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power Therefore make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident To avoid fire hazard the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time for example when on vacation D3 4 2 2 2a_A_En This product is for general household purposes Any failure due to use for other than household purposes such as long term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period K041_En X If you
53. connection component S Video or composite Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed but so long as there is no problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction e Select ON for the HDMI control setting see Setting the HDMI Control mode on page 92 e Turn the TV s power on before turning on this amplifier s power e Set the TV side HDMI control setting to ON e Connect the TV to the HDMI OUT 1 terminal and set the HDMI output to HDMI OUT 1 Then turn on first the TV s power then this amplifier s power Additional information Important information regarding the HDMI connection There are cases where you may not be able to route HDMI signals through this amplifier this depends on the HDMI equipped component you are connecting check with the manufacturer for HDMI compatibility information If you aren t receiving HDMI signals properly through this amplifier from your component please try one of the following configurations when connecting up Configuration A Use component video cables to connect the video output of your HDMI equipped component to the amplifier s component video input The amplifier can then convert the analog component video signal to a digital HDMI signal for transmission to the display For this configuration use the most convenient connection digital is recommended for sending audio to the amplifier See the operating instructions for
54. connections hub 1OOBASE TX 10BASE T or crossed cable and other cable quality distorted Block noise appears when cabled directly to a PC It is strongly recommended to use 100BASE TX for playback quality and display speed e Check if the PC is operating properly Reboot the PC after confirming its specifications and setup e Check if the file complies to the supported format bit rate or profile Also check if the file is damaged e When connected by a wireless LAN check if the bit rate is sufficient e Some files that comply with the supported format may not be played back or displayed Cannot play or display e Check the physical connections hub 1OOBASE TX 10BASE T or crossed cable and other cable quality when cabled directly to a PC It is strongly recommended to use 100BASE TX for playback quality and display speed e Check if the PC is operating properly Reboot the PC after confirming its specifications and setup e Check if the file complies to the supported format bit rate or profile Also check if the file is damaged e Check if the leasing contract for the server has expired e When connected by a wireless LAN check if the bit rate is sufficient e Some files that comply with the supported format may not be played back or displayed e It takes time to capture and display a large sized image If this is the case no operation may be performed e See the Pioneer website htto Awww pioneer eu for the formats that are supported
55. cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local dealer If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for your socket outlet then the fuse shall be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of safely There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket If anew plug is to be fitted please observe the wiring code as shown below If in any doubt please consult a qualified electrician IMPORTANT The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code Blue Neutral Brown Live As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter Lor coloured RED How to replace the fuse Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse WARNING Before plugging in for the first time read the following section carefully The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or region Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area where this unit will be used meets the required voltage e g 230 V or 1
56. display LIGHT_M1 on the LCD 05 Listening to your system En Chapter 5 Listening to your system A Important e The listening modes and many features described in this section may not be available depending on the current source settings and status of the amplifier See Listening modes with different input signal formats on page 141 for more on this Auto playback There are many ways to listen back to sources using this amplifier but for the simplest most direct listening option is the Auto Surround feature The amplifier automatically detects what kind of source you re playing and selects multichannel or stereo playback as necessary AUTO DIRECT e While listening to a source press AUTO DIRECT AUTO SURROUND STREAM DIRECT for auto playback of a source AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display before showing the decoding or playback format Check the digital format indicators in the front LCD display to see how the source is being processed Listening in surround sound Using this amplifier you can listen to any source in surround sound However the options available will depend on your speaker setup and the type of source you re listening to If you connected surround back speakers see also Using surround back channel processing on page 37 Note Standard surround sound The following modes provide basic surround sound for stereo and multichannel sources STANDARD e While listen
57. e For HDMI or when digital video conversion is switched off in Setting the Video options on page 101 you must connect your TV to this amplifier using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component e Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using component video HDMI or S Video cables see The Input Setup menu on page 94 e Check the video output settings of the source component e Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct e Some components such as video game units have resolutions that may not be converted If adjusting this amplifier s Resolution setting in Setting the Video options on page 101 and or the resolution settings on your component or display doesn t work try switching Digital Video Conversion in Setting the Video options on page 101 OFF Can t record video e Check that the source is not copy protected e The video converter is not available when making recordings Check that the same type of video cable is used for connecting both the recorder and the video source the one you want to record to this amplifier Noisy intermittent or distorted Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal during scanning for example or the video picture quality may just be poor with some video game units for example The picture quality may also depend on the settings etc of your display device Switch off the video converter and reconnect the sou
58. eight whereas Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD support more than eight audio channels EE Additional information En Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby Pro Logic Surround EX and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories DTS The DTS technologies are explained below See www dtstech com for more detailed information S dts np Master Audio DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is a 5 1 channel audio coding system from DTS Inc now widely used for DVD Video DVD Audio 5 1 music discs digital broadcasts and video games It can deliver up to six discrete audio channels comprising five full range channels including an LFE channel Higher sound quality is achieved through the use of a low compression rate and high rates of transmittance during playback DTS ES DTS ES the ES stands for Extended Surround is a decoder that is capable of decoding both DIS ES Discrete 6 1 and DIS ES Matrix 6 1 encoded sources DTS ES Discrete 6 1 gives true 6 1 channel sound with a completely separate discrete Surround back channel DTS ES Matrix 6 1 has a surround back channel matrixed into the surround left right channels Both sources are also compatible with a conventional DTS 5 1 channel decoder DTS Neo 6 DTS Neo 6 can generate 7 1 channel surround sound from any matrixed stereo source such as video or TV and trom 5 1 channel sources It uses both the
59. front panel or by pressing HDMI on the remote control repeatedly e Setthe HDMI parameter in Setting the Audio options on page 99 to THROUGH if you want to hear HDMI audio output from your TV or plasma television no sound will be heard from this amplifier e f the video signal does not appear on your TV or plasma television try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display Note that some components such as video game units have resolutions that may not be converted In this case use an analog video connection e You can t hear HDMI audio through this amplifiers digital out jacks j 5400 5400 NE NA INE INE Ng NG ETEJ Pr Pe Y EJAN oi tsi a CQ EC SEL nC Owe HDMICTRL OUT2 OUT OUT IN HA oven o2 IN IN lt 08 RS IN o9 232c CE BD 08 n REC SEL REC SEL O C O 2 IN Ae we paio IN IN lt N lt z OVRVCR1 A DVD LD I m ae ABLE VRIVCR 2 m l BD IN r 4 TUNER MONITOR NE O ap ap Ss Ofk SAT ZONE2 ZONE3 COMPONENT O ap IN OUT OUT 3 PHONO r aS ap VIDEO 4 GAME 1 l d a AUDIO a VIDEO DC OUT 12V TOTAL 250 mA MAX HDMI DVI compatible monitor or plasma television About HDMI HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface supports both video and audio on a single digital connection for use with DVD players DIV set top boxes and other AV devices HDMI was developed to provide the technologies of High Band
60. function cannot be used when Type 2 is set oO Caution e f your i LINK connector comes into contact with metallic parts of the amplifier other than the i LINK terminal an electrical short may occur Some cables have metal parts that may touch the unit when connected Please take care to use a Suitable i LINK cable only A Important e Please use 4 pin S400 cables less than 3 5 meters long Although longer ones are available they may not work reliably e There may be cases where the PQLS rate control function and or the i LINK audio does not work properly even when connected to i LINK Audio compatible equipment e Do not connect disconnect i LINK cables or switch on off any components connected using i LINK when the amplifier is on 1 Usean i LINK cable to connect one of the i LINK connectors on this amplifier to an i LINK connector on your i LINK component SC LX90 HDMI ASSIGNABLE 1916 ome i INK equipped component Other connections e The arrow on the cable connector body should be lined up with the arrow to the left of the connector on the amplitier for correct alignment The i LINK cable should be inserted straight into the connector so that it snaps easily into place If not connected properly the amplifier will not be able to recognize any connected components Note that the i LINK cable is fragile and can be broken easily if too much force is used when connecting
61. icon changes The selected movie scenes are repeatedly played back To return to normal mode press AUTO DIRECT Blue again while in the A B repeat mode Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs CH Note e The A B repeat function is only available during playback in normal mode e fthe screen display doesn t match the player status a malfunction may have occurred Stop playback then try the operation again Repeat Mode 1 While playing content in the Media Navigator or USB device press STEREO F S SURR Red to select Repeat Once The title being played is repeated 2 Press STEREO F S SURR Red again to cancel the repeat mode Repeat Off is selected After playing the currently selected title the Player stops Note e When playing content in the Playlist you can select from Repeat Off Repeat All plays all items in the Playlist repeatedly or Repeat Once plays the content being watched repeatedly Random Mode 1 While playing content in the Playlist press STANDARD Green to select Random On Random Repeat playback starts 2 Press STANDARD Green again to cancel the random mode Random Off is selected Note e The Random Repeat mode is only available for content in the Playlist or in Consecutive Playback mode Enjoying music files You can display the menu as a List Thumbnail or Thumbnail List screen Press ADV SURR Yellow then select an option under Change view on
62. may not get the same results after you perform calibration again depending on your audiovisual environment and your speaker system 4 This can be done in Automatically setting up for surround sound MCACC amp Full Band Phase Control on page 11 or Automatic MCACC Expert on page 40 either of which you should have already completed The System Setup menu 06 Checking MCACC preset data After you have completed Automatically setting up for surround sound MCACC amp Full Band Phase Control on page 11 or Automatic MCACC Expert on page 40 you can check your calibrated settings using the on screen display 1 Select MCACC Data Check from the Data Management setup menu DVD LD 55 0dB DVD 55 0dB D LD 5 Data Management 5a MCACC Data Check 2 Channel Level 3 Speaker Distance 4 Standing Wave 5 Acoustic Cal EQ 6 FULL BAND PHASE CTRL b Memory Rename c MCACC Memory Copy d MCACC Memory Clear e Output PC ENTER Next O Return 2 Select the setting you want to check e tis useful to do this while a source is playing so you can compare the different settings 3 Select the MCACC preset that you want to check Use the buttons if necessary to switch speakers settings DVD LD 5a5 EQ Data Check oe LiP 63 55 0dB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 Press RETURN to go back to the Data Check menu repeating steps 2 and 3 to check other settings 5 When you re fini
63. menu Be sure to disconnect the microphone trom this amplifier upon completion of the Auto MCACC setup Note Speaker output setting e Default setting Normal You can set the usage purpose for the ten channels worth of speaker terminals One of five patterns can be selected according to the speaker layout and usage purpose see Selecting the speaker layout usage pattern on page 9 1 Select Output Setup from the System Setup menu See Making amplifier settings from the System Setup menu on page 40 if you re not already at this screen DVD LD 55 0dB DVD LD System Setup MENU 2 Output Setup 1 Auto MCACC lt Manual MCACC Front Normal FULL BAND PHASE CTRL Center Normal Data Management Surr Array Normal Input Setup OSD Language Other Setup 3 4 5 6 Manual SP Setup SB 7 8 9 Confirm 4 Cancel The amplifier s volume is set to the minimum in order to protect the speakers 2 Select the speaker setting e Normal Select for Normal surround connections e All Ch Bi Amp Select for 5 2 channel Bi amp connections Front Bi Amp Select for 7 2 channel front Bi amp connections e 7 2ch ZONE 2 Select for 7 2 channel Zone 2 connections e 7 2ch Speaker B Select for 7 2 channel speaker B connections 3 Select Confirm The layout of the speaker terminals for the selected item is displayed 4 Check the layout
64. middle and low frequency ranges respectively Though these speakers are designed to flatten the frequency amplitude characteristics across wide ranges there are cases where the group delay characteristics are not effectively flattened This phase distortion of the speakers subsequently causes group delay the delay of low frequency sound against high frequency sound during audio signal playback 1 e Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction If two waveforms are in phase they crest and trough together resulting in increased amplitude clarity and presence of the sound signal If a crest of a wave meets a trough as shown in the upper section of the diagram above then the sound will be out of phase and an unreliable sound image will be produced e The PHASE CONTROL feature is available even when the headphones are plugged in e f your subwoofer has a phase control switch set it to the plus sign or 0 However the effect you can actually feel when PHASE CONTROL is set to ON on this amplifier depends on the type of your subwoofer Set your subwoofer to maximize the effect It is also recommended you try changing the orientation or the place of your subwoofer e Set the built in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to OFF If this cannot be done on your subwoofer set the cutoff frequency to a higher value e If the speaker distance is not properly set you may not have a m
65. next image Setting up BGM for the slideshow 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed 2 Select photo content in the Media Navigator USB device or My Playlist then ENTER The Photo Player launches and photo content is displayed in full screen 3 Press ADV SURR Yellow then select BGM Setup from the Tool Menu t then ENTER A BGM Setup dialog screen appears 4 Select a Playlist from the list as BGM then ENTER A check mark is provided beside the selected Playlist When you select a different Playlist and press ENTER the mark jumps to the new Playlist from the previously selected one BGM Setup Playlistl Playlist2 Playlist3 Playlist4 Playlist5 BGMON oS cancel 5 Select BGM ON BGM ON Random or BGM OFF from the BGM status box then ENTER 6 Select OK then ENTER Note e When a slideshow is started while a music file is playing playback of the music file continues Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs CH Starting the slideshow 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed 2 Selecta folder containing photo content t then ENTER The Thumbnail screen is displayed Thumbnail List or List screen is displayed depending on the setting 3 Select the desired photo file from the Thumbnail screen then ENTER The photo content is displayed in full screen
66. not allow you to play is selected A file that is copyright protected and not playable on this unit is selected 501 License of the selected file is not valid 501 A file that the server does not allow you to play is selected A file that is copyright protected and not playable on this unit is selected 503 License of the selected file is not valid 503 A file that the server does not allow you to play is selected A file that is copyright protected and not playable on this unit is selected 504 License of the selected file is not valid 504 A file that the server does not allow you to play is selected A file that is copyright protected and not playable on this unit is selected 505 License of the selected file is not valid 505 A file that the server does not allow you to play is selected A file that is copyright protected and not playable on this unit is selected e The message consists of Error Warning and Information is displayed for 5 seconds Displaying pictures in the Home Media Gallery for an extended period may cause an after image Note e f the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions Additional information Surround sound formats Below is a brief description of the main surround sound formats you ll find on DVDs satellite cable and terrestrial broadcasts and vi
67. of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 11 BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 12 INNO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the
68. of the output terminals then select YES The setting is made according to the selected item 5 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the System Setup menu 1 e Depending on the characteristics of your room sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with different size settings You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 52 e The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position This setting should be accurate taking delay and room characteristics into account and generally does not need to be changed e If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment we recommend adjusting the settings manually 2 Since the distance measurements have been set according to the sound characteristics of your speakers there are cases where for optimal surround sound the actual distance may differ from the speaker distance setting 3 e When changing the speaker output settings we recommend selecting the speaker layout usage pattern first e All the MCACC memory settings are cleared when the speaker output settings are changed Perform the Auto MCACC Setup procedure again after changing the speaker connections and speaker output settings see page 11 En 06 The System Setup menu En Manual MCACC setup You can use the sett
69. on page 13 The Auto MCACC display appears once the microphone is connected t t DVD LD 1 Auto MCACC A mpor an Output Setup Normal e Make sure the microphone and speakers are not moved during the Auto MCACC Setup e Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any existing settings for the MCACC preset you select e Before using the Auto MCACC Setup the headphones should be disconnected and the iPod or HOME MEDIA GALLERY function should not be selected as an input source Caution e The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are output at high volume Save SYMMETRY to M1 MEMORY 1 lt START gt ENTER Start s Cancel 3 Make sure Normal is selected select an MCACC preset then select START 4 Follow the instructions on screen Make sure the microphone is connected and if you re using a Subwoofer make sure it is Switched on and set to a comfortable volume level 5 Wait for the test tones to finish then confirm the speaker configuration in the OSD Gare A progress report is displayed on screen while the TV AMP AV AMPLIFIER amplifier outputs test tones to determine the speakers present in your setup Try to be as quiet as possible while it s doing this If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the speaker configuration check screen is being displayed the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically In this case you don t need to select OK and press ENT
70. on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus itis not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program or with a work based on the Program on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may copy and distribute the Program or a work based on it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following a Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or b Accompany it with a written offer valid for at least three years to give any third party fora charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or c Accompany it with the information you received as to the of
71. server type or version used e In rare cases the image on the screen may appear jagged when photo content is selected directly from a USB device If this is the case the problem may be solved by viewing the photo content through the network after having transferred it to the server PC e Even with the supported format files may not be played properly depending on the content Setting up the slideshow You can enjoy a slideshow with music in the background To activate this feature you must register music content in My Playlist List beforehand see My Playlist on page 76 and Setting up BGM for the slideshow below 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed 2 Select Media Navigator then ENTER 3 Press ADV SURR Yellow A pop up screen of the Tool Menu appears 4 Select Slide Show Setup t then ENTER 5 Select the desired setup item then ENTER 6 Enter the setting in the Effect or Interval box f then ENTER Repeat steps 5 and 6 to enter another setup Slide Show Setup Effect on interval M Cancel 08 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs 7 Select OK then ENTER The slideshow setup finishes Note e After setting the Interval time it may take longer than the preset time as the Interval time means the time up until the Home Media Gallery starts obtaining the next image Key operations may not work while obtaining the
72. setting the source is sent from this amplifier at maximum volume so make sure the volume is quite low in the sub zone at first and then experiment to find the correct level Note 4 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Other Setup menu SR Setup for Pioneer plasma televisions Make the following settings if you have connected a Pioneer plasma television to this amplifier using an SR cable Note that the number of function settings available will depend on the plasma television you ve connected See also Using this amplifier with a Pioneer plasma television on page 68 and Using the SR mode with a Pioneer plasma television on page 69 1 Select SR Setup from the Other Setup menu DVD LD 55 00B DVD LD 9 Other Setup 9d SR Setup a Multi Ch In Setup PDP Volume Control b ZONE Video Setup i OFF G c ZONE Audio Setup CAST Monitor Out Connect e HDMI Control Setup OFF f i LINK Check g Display Image Return Finish 2 Select the PDP Volume Control setting you want e OFF he amplifier does not control the volume of the plasma television e ON When the amplifier is switched to one of the inputs that use the plasma television DVD LD for example the volume on the plasma television is muted so only sound from the amplifier is heard 3 Assign any input source connected to the plasma television to the corresponding input number This matches the amplifier s in
73. setting you want to copy e All Data Copies all the settings of the selected MCACC preset memory e LEVEL amp DISTANCE Copies only the channel level and speaker distance settings of the selected MCACC preset memory 3 Select the MCACC preset you ll be copying the settings From then specify where you want to copy them To Make sure you don t overwrite an MCACC preset you re currently using this can t be undone 4 Select OK to confirm and copy the settings Completed shows in the OSD to confirm the MCACC preset has been copied then you automatically return to the Data Management setup menu Clearing MCACC presets If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets stored in memory you can choose to clear the calibration settings of that preset 1 Select MCACC Memory Clear from the Data Management setup menu DVD LD 55 0dB DVD LD 55 0dB 5 Data Management 5d MCACC Memory Clear a MCACC Data Check b Memory Rename Clear LINTE c MCACC Memory Cop d MCACC Memory Clear e Output PC Start Clear Cancel Cancel 2 Select the MCACC preset you want to clear Make sure you don t clear an MCACC preset you re currently using this can t be undone 3 Select OK to confirm and clear the preset Completed shows in the OSD to confirm the MCACC preset has been cleared then you automatically return to the Data Management setup menu 1 The settings made in Automaticall
74. speaker only make sure that speaker is hooked up to the left surround back terminal The System Setup menu e SW Select the number of subwoofer you have one or two LFE signals and bass frequencies of channels set to SMALL are output from the subwoofer when YES is selected Choose the PLUS setting if you want the subwoofer to output bass sound continuously or you want deeper bass the bass frequencies that would normally come out the front and center speakers are also routed to the subwoofer If you did not connect a subwoofer choose NO the bass frequencies are output from other speakers 3 Select X OVER and set the crossover frequency Frequencies below this point will be sent to the subwoofer or LARGE speakers 4 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu Channel Level Using the channel level settings you can adjust the overall balance of your speaker system an important factor when setting up a home theater system A Important e When Channel Level is selected while MCACC is set to OFF the selection screen for the MCACC memory appears Select a memory to adjust manually DVD LD 55 0dB 6b Channel Level Select MCACC memory MCACC OFF Vv A M1 MEMORY 1 g ENTER Next Cancel 1 Select Channel Level from the Manual SP Setup menu DVD LD 55 0dB DVD LD 6 Manual SP Setup 6b Channel Level MCACC M1 MEMORY 1 a Speaker Setting b Channel
75. the Tool Menu You can also navigate through the subsequent or preceding menu levels in the server or USB device by pressing B or ENTER When you select music content from the server menu on the Media Navigator screen the Music Player automatically launches Select a category folder or device to access the submenu containing the required file or content The Music Player screen appears when you select a music file from My Playlist just like selecting a file in the server Note e The Music Player only displays a List screen Screen Components 9 7 8 10 Category or Folder name Jacket image Music icon Playing Music icon Contents list Number of items Detailed display Play status Time counter O ON AU PWN Key guide Progress bar _ om lt O A B repeat mode icon N Repeat mode icon 13 Random mode icon Music Player key guide Button s Function t Moves up a cursor to a title above 4 Moves down a cursor to a title below ENTER Plays back the selected music content Pauses the music content being played if it is highlighted in the Playlist screen or plays the selected music content if different content is highlighted by pressing T 4 Fast reverse during playback or when in PAUSE Each press toggles the reverse speed among x 2 x 4 x 8 x 20 x 50 and x 100 When the beginning of the content is reached it pauses gt Fast forward during playback or when in PAUSE Each p
76. the level down until OVER disappears from the display tip e Changing the frequency curve of one channel too drastically will affect the overall balance If the speaker balance seems uneven you can raise or lower channel levels using test tones with the TRIM feature Use to select TRIM then use to raise or lower the channel level for the current speaker 3 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu Note Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system based on the direct sound coming from the speakers It can also provide you with a graphical output of the frequency response of your room How to use Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional If you find that lower frequencies seem overly reverberant in your listening room i e it sounds boomy or that different channels seem to exhibit different reverb characteristics select EQ Pro amp S Wave or ALL for the Custom Menu setting in Automatic WCACC Expert on page 40 to calibrate the room automatically This should provide a balanced calibration that suits the characteristics of your listening room If you still aren t satisfied with the results the manual Advanced EQ setup below provides a more customized calibration of your system using the direct sound of the speakers This is done with the help of a graphical
77. the surround speakers farther away from the listening position than the front and center speakers Doing so can weaken the surround sound effect To achieve the best possible surround sound install your speakers as shown below Be sure all speakers are Installed securely to prevent accidents and improve sound quality Front Front left Center right Subwoofer Subwoofer Surround Surround left A right A _ Surround Listening position Surround left B right B i Surround back left 1 Surround back right Single surround back speaker oO Caution Make sure that all speakers are securely installed This not only improves sound quality but also reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting trom speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of external shocks such as earthquakes Connecting your equipment The diagrams below show suggested surround and surround back speaker orientation The first diagram fig A shows orientation with one surround back speaker or none connected The second fig B shows orientation with two surround back speakers connected 90 to 120 7 7 d 7 fig A fig B e f you have two surround back speakers THX recommends placing them together and the same distance trom your listening position see below THX speaker system setup If you have a complete THX speaker system follow the diagram below to place your speakers Note that the surround speakers H indica
78. this unit s power is turned off and you have a supported source begin playback while using the HDMI Control function the audio and video output from the HDMI connection are output from the plasma television e OFF he HDMI Control is disabled Synchronized operations cannot be used When this unit s power is turned off audio and video of sources connected via HDMI are not output 5 When you re finished press SETUP You will finish to System Setup menu Before using synchronization Once you have finished all connections and settings you must 1 Put all components into standby mode 2 Turn the power on for all components with the power for the plasma television being turned on last Note 3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is connected to this amplifier and see if video output from connected components displays properly on the screen or not 4 Check whether the components connected to all HDMI inputs are properly displayed Synchronized amp mode Synchronized amp mode begins once you carry out an operation for the plasma television For more information see the operating manual of your plasma television Synchronized amp mode operations By connecting a component to this amplifier with an HDMI cable you can use synchronized amp mode which allows you to synchronize the following operations e Displays on the plasma television when you mute or adjust the volume of this amplifier The input of
79. this amplifier is automatically changed when playback occurs on a connected component e Even if you change this amplifier s input to a device that is not connected by HDMI the synchronized amp mode remains in effect This amplifier s input switches automatically when the channel is switched on an HDMI control compatible plasma television This amplifiers OSD language switches automatically when the menu language is switched on an HDMI control compatible plasma television e By pressing GENRE when listening to a source from a HDD DVD recorder the most appropriate listening mode is automatically selected see Using the genre synchronizing function on page 39 for more on this Canceling synchronized amp mode Operate the plasma television to cancel the synchronized amp mode If you cancel synchronized amp mode while connected via HDMI to a plasma television or while you are watching a IV programme the power for this unit is turned off 1 e When HDMI Control is set to ON the audio video signals input at the HDMI IN terminals are output at the HDMI OUT terminal even when this amplifier is switched off e With HDMI Control set to ON Input Setup and HDMI Input are automatically set to OFF 2 The linked mode remains in effect even when this amplifier s input is switched to something other than HDMI About HDMI Control e Connect the plasma television directly to this amplifier Interrupting a direct connection with othe
80. using F S SURR WIDE a better effect can be obtained if Auto MCACC Setup is performed For more on this refer to Automatically setting up for surround sound WCACC amp Full Band Phase Control on page 11 2 There are cases where a brief noise is heard before playback of sources other than PCM Please select AUTO SURROUND or DIRECT if this is a problem Listening to your system 05 OO RF Selects a Od RF signal Selecting MCACC presets e HDMI Selects an HDMI signal e Default setting MEMORY 1 If you have calibrated your system for different listening positions you can switch between settings to suit the kind of source you re listening to and where you re sitting for example watching movies from a sofa or playing a b HDMI DIGITAL video game close to the TV e amp B Selects an i LINK signal e PCM Only PCM signals are output The amplifier selects the first available signal in the following order Using surround back channel SOURCE K processing e Default setting SBch ON 1 Set the operation selector switch to AMP You can have the amplifier automatically use 6 1 or 7 1 decoding for 6 1 encoded sources for example Dolby 2 While listening to a source press MCACC Digital EX or DTS ES or you can choose to always use Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets 6 1 or 7 1 decoding for example with 5 1 encoded or to switch calibration off See Data Management on material
81. you ve made for other input functions e An i LINK equipped video component should be assigned to the input function to which you have connected the video signal from the component e f you assign an i LINK input to a certain function for example DVD LD then any digital inputs previously assigned to that function will automatically be set to i LINK not assigned Other Settings CH e PDP In SR To control certain functions on this amplifier from a plasma television select the display input to which you ve connected the amplifier 7 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the System Setup menu Input function default and possible settings The terminals on the rear of the amplifier generally correspond to the name of one of the input source functions If you have connected components to this amplitier differently from or in addition to the defaults below see The Input Setup menu on page 94 to tell the amplifier how you ve connected up The dots indicate possible assignments Input Input Terminals DVD LD COAX 1 o IN 1 IN 1 BD COAX 2 o IN 2 TV OPT 1 o SAT OPT 2 o DVR VCR 1 OPT3 o IN 4 Fixed DVR VCR 2 OPT4 o IN 5 Fixed VIDEO OPT 5 o IN 3 e GAME 1 VIDEO Fixed o Fixed GAME 2 HDMI 1 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 4 HDMI 5 HDMI 5 HDMI 6 HDMI 6 MULTI CH o IN HOME MEDIA GALLERY CD COAX 3
82. your speakers as shown below This illustration below shows the connections for bi amping your front left speaker Hook up your bi amp compatible speakers for other channels in the same way Bi amp sual FRONT compatible ajea _ speaker V7 E OLE O D e Make sure that the connections are properly inserted Other connections oO Caution e Most speakers with both High and Low terminals have two metal plates that connect the High to the Low terminals These must be removed when you are bi amping the speakers or you could severely damage the amplifier See your speaker manual for more information e f your speakers have a removable crossover network make sure you do not remove it for bicamping Doing so may damage your speakers Bi wiring your speakers The reasons for bi wiring are basically the same as bi amping but additionally interference effects within the wire could be reduced producing better sound Again to do this your speakers must be bi wireable that is they must have separate terminals for the high and low frequencies e To bi wire a speaker connect two speaker cords to the speaker terminal on the amplifier Caution e Make sure you use a parallel not series which are fairly uncommon connection when bi wiring your speakers e Don t connect different speakers from the same terminal in this way Connecting additional amplifiers This amplifier has more than enough po
83. 20 V written on the rear panel D3 4 2 1 4_A_En WARNING To prevent a fire hazard do not place any naked flame sources such as a lighted candle on the equipment D3 4 2 1 7a_A_En European model only This product complies with the Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC and EMC Directive 2004 108 EC D3 4 2 1 9a_A_En D3 4 2 1 2 2_B_En WARNING This equipment is not waterproof To prevent a fire or shock hazard do not place any container filled with liquid near this equipment such as a vase or flower pot or expose it to dripping splashing rain or moisture D3 4 2 1 3_B_En VENTILATION CAUTION When installing this unit make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation at least 60 cm at top 10 cm at rear and 30 cm at each side WARNING Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating To prevent fire hazard the openings should never be blocked or covered with items such as newspapers table cloths curtains or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed D3 4 2 1 7b_A_En If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel If connected to an AC outlet the cut off plug
84. 39 HDMI OUT Switch the HDMI output terminal page 103 MCACC Press to switch between MCACC presets page 37 12 SOURCE Press to turn on off other components connected to the amplifier See page 106 for more on this 13 INPUT SELECT Use to select the input source 14 Remote control operation selector switch Set to AMP to operate the amplifier TV or SOURCE to operate the TV or the source device When this switch is set to AMP the amplifier can be controlled used to select the green commands above the number buttons A ATT etc Also use this switch to set up Surround sound page 11 page 40 15 VOL Use to set the listening volume 16 MUTE Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been muted adjusting the volume also restores the sound eats control illumination button On this amplifier s remote control the illumination of some of the buttons and the LCD light when buttons are operated or the remote control operation selector switch is switched They also light when the remote control illumination button is pressed and turn off when the button is pressed again This function is convenient when operating in dark rooms If you do not want the illumination to light when buttons are operated press and hold in the remote control illumination button for 5 seconds to display LIGHT_M2 on the LCD To return to the original setting press the remote control illumination button again for 5 seconds to
85. 9 UPRP Universal Plug and Play ian e 5 dae Ses 89 USB Universal Serial BUS ccs ve Sealer ou Sedaka 89 Windows Medit CONNEC E saver at te eda g ie 89 WIOOWS Wiedia IRN emaa Gee ie a aa we 89 Windows Media Play eben cin ake tol a a toate 89 Details of compatible formats wii i4 wien deat Bas 89 09 HDMI Control Making the HDMI Control connections 91 oeno MERON OBUONS i a a eA ol 92 Senno the AIPM COMO MOJE s ass duty ane etaa 92 Before using SVACHTONIZALION i enc ses eSee sea eee 92 SVC MROMIZEC amp Ode ternar e EARE 92 Synchronized amp mode operations 92 Canceling synchronized amp mode 005 92 About ADOMI CONTO e Taradi e 2 wie a needed Goatees 93 10 Other Settings 13 Additional information TretiOUl Seto Mean ae ch pet ea ea be ot R aren 94 SPAKE SCUING GUE eiaa aes E N A 112 Input function default and possible settings 95 Positional relationship between speakers and Changing the OSD display language PONO Gas a5 ade a hoot td aed hare ae Bae Das 114 KO SID AIG WIGS it gs ade See ated Ane A erate S 95 THOUDIES A OOUING 4 5 5 tie ics aya ath at a ante betes 115 MEORE EUDEN oaia erte ea a 96 PONG erregen te tle dp bray ate e e p ke MEG Rania IOUT C UDa 45 ee ceteuce ate eos a ats 96 NO eS o sen pan eactis sent e weed aan Wee e SAT iis ZONE VIGO SE N rera cnn eh ae ated a 96 OLE audio PDrobleMS s ti dinosaur Cae ii ierse 116 LOIN OGIO CUO Gey Get a ps areas Se wae Sea HD CE 97 e E EERE PE
86. 90 HDMI cable is not properly connected e Check the connection HDMI C ERR 1A0 e There may be a broken wire in the cable HDMI C ERR 1B0 e This amplifier or connected components may be damaged HDMI C ERR 1C0 HDMI C ERR 2C0 EE Additional information HOME MEDIA GALLERY messages No Message Problem 001 Content playback failed 001 No details are available for the error 100 A communication error occurred 100 No further details are available for the error 101 No response from the server 101 Timeout period reaches due to delayed server response 102 Disconnected from the network 102 Cables are disconnected 103 Invalid response was received from the server 103 Invalid response from the server 300 This format is not supported 300 A file that is not supported is selected 400 License of the selected file is not valid 400 A file that is copyright protected and not playable on this unit is selected 401 License of the selected file is not valid 401 A file that is copyright protected and not playable on this unit is selected 403 License of the selected file is not valid 403 A file that is copyright protected and not playable on this unit is selected 404 License of the selected file is not valid 404 A file that is copyright protected and not playable on this unit is selected 500 License of the selected file is not valid 500 A file that the server does
87. AV Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 64 kHz Quantization bits 16 No channels Up to 2 e Windows Media Audio 9 WMA9 Sampling frequency Up to 48 kHz Bit rate Up to 768 kbps No channels Up to 2 Windows Media Audio 9 Professional WMA9 Pro Sampling frequency Up to 48 kHz Bit rate Up to 768 kbps No channels Up to 6 Multi channel audio signals are down mixed to 2 channels Compatible image file formats e JPEG Resolution Up to 8192 x 8192 pixels YUV444 YUV422 YUV420 1280 x 768 pixels RGB and grayscale This amplifier is not compatible with progressive JPEG images e BMP Resolution No restrictions e PNG Resolution Up to 2048 x 1024 pixels e TIFF Resolution Up to 2048 x 1024 pixels Compression format Uncompressed ZIP LZW Packbits Huffman RLE CCITT Fax 3 4 e GIF Resolution Up to 2048 x 1024 pixels This amplifier is not compatible with animated GIF images En Chapter 9 By connecting this amplifier to an HDMI Control A compatible Pioneer plasma television or the HDD DVD Important recorder with an HDMI cable you can control this e When connecting this system or changing amplifier from the remote control of aconnected plasma connections be sure to switch the power off and television as well as have the connected plasma disconnect the power cord from the wall socket television automatically change inputs in response to After completing all connections connect the power operations carr
88. B devices This system reads FAT16 FAT32 and NTFS Readable data files Movie music and photo files can also be played with the exception of Digital Rights Management WMDRM10 protected Tiles Note e A single USB device can be connected at a time and no USB hub connected e This system may not be able to display modified or edited content from a PC or other equipment e This system supports the USB Mass Storage Class Some digital cameras may require a setup procedure for Mass Storage Class data transfer The setup is done on the camera See the operating instructions supplied with the digital camera e This system may not be able to display images depending on the type of your memory card or camera Removing a USB device To remove a USB device exit the Home Media Gallery first and then disconnect the device Note e Be sure to exit the Home Media Gallery screen before removing the USB device If you remove the USB device while the Home Media Gallery screen is displayed data inside the memory may be damaged e Do not insert or remove the USB device immediately after this amplifier is switched on or off This action may cause data inside the memory to be damaged e Pioneer is not liable for any loss or damage to the data inside the USB flash drive Starting the Home Media Gallery function 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed 2 Select Media Navigator USB
89. CD discs but if the sound distorts it is best to switch the gain setting back to 0 dB g This feature is only available when the connected display supports the automatic audio video synchronizing capability lip sync for HDMI If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable set AUTO DELAY to OFF and adjust the delay time manually For more details about the lip sync feature of your display contact the manufacturer directly h Only when listening to 2 channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode i Only when listening to 2 channel sources in Neo 6 MUSIC CINEMA mode Using other functions cH Adjusting the surround B speaker delay Surr B DELAY The listening area can be expanded by setting the surround B speaker to the array mode This results in a sound field with good front rear and left right sound connectivity Depending on the position of the speakers and the listening position however in some cases adding a delay to the speakers set to the array mode can resultin a more natural surround effect In such cases it is possible to set the surround B channel to the array mode using the Surr B DELAY audio adjustment function add delay processing to the surround B channel and fine adjust The delay can be set between 0 and 20 ms with a high precision of 1 ms Adjust the delay value while playing movies or music and set it to the desired position to achieve a m
90. CON ma ier SPAA S re irena cea nnn pe Connecting aU SB dV CE nisa ha Ee Rie ures I9 Readable USB dEVCE ea E E E 14 Redone Cala ES a o a a a o 14 REMONT a UO BOE Ea Bo ten ka h 14 Starting the Home Media Gallery function 14 Navigating the files and folders 00 eee TA Selectable screen display e eee 19 USETE LOO WICC raai aa i Ste 3 T9 Medid Navodilo acento aves Erpen pena ane ae 76 Sree COn Oone rea aa AR E i AEE 76 WES a E EE Eg E EE E EE EE 76 NIT NAS pdemh Baca eine AN Moke meas aA a 16 ERIOVING MOVETIS S aa sano ccircicawhh where we tated 76 Sree COMOONC Sua res bake bernie et ahaa re Movie Player Key g le sosser iras sienen Gee ewe a TIE SEC Min wtarced tt Riis Gok Wk towed cee Nara isnt eee 18 OW PAV OAC eet bets oe wr aaro Ho cee ee A 718 POTOM WAN SUS he it onch aiasy irate ara EETA 18 Pash Forward Fasl REVOIS C raner 44 rowed 18 Forward Reverse 15 sec asuaan bets eee es 78 PS INODE A VIOCC ws 6 chen t bt aie Baris ow E eee 718 PRODE aI WIOUS ii ata Ral tetas tlio ke ite ein 719 Random MOGE 2 34 0 ee dole 4 ot oh tits de wed et ts 79 EPO MUSIC HCG a8 ong a Aa a ONIANA 719 SCIECM COMPONENTS 5 Goan a Nt ale white tien eek aoa a 719 Music Player key guide 0 cece eee ee 19 A B Repeat Mode cc cece ee 80 Repeat VIOUS auicd Wack eo E eee Poteet Dame es 80 RaO IMIOG Gr orero rar dink Pal hice a ane deat 80 E MOVING OMOLODIOS aniran N o mucins ate mice 81 SEKECM COMPONEM S axccadan
91. Can t record audio e You can only make a digital recording from a digital source and an analog recording from an analog SOUICe e For digital sources make sure that what you re recording isn t copy protected e Check that the OUT jacks are properly connected to the recorders input jacks see Connecting analog audio sources on page 26 Recorded audio is different from The RECOUT source is set to an input source other than the source you re listening to Select RECOUT the current source or inaudible SOURCE to record the current input source see Playing a different source when recording on page 102 Subwoofer output is very low e To route more signal to the subwoofer set it to PLUS or set the front speakers to SMALL see Speaker Setting on page 52 Everything seems to be set up e The speakers may be out of phase Check that the positive negative speaker terminals on the amplifier are correctly but the playback sound matched with the corresponding terminals on the speakers see Connecting the speakers on page 28 is odd The PHASE CONTROL feature e If applicable check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off or the lowpass cutoff is set to doesn t seem to have an audible the highest frequency setting If there is a PHASE setting on your subwoofer set it to 0 or depending on effect the subwoofer the setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound e Make sure the speaker distance setti
92. Connecting your equipment 03 Connecting digital audio sources This amplifier has both digital inputs and outputs allowing you to connect digital audio components for playback and for making digital recordings Most digital components also have analog connections See Connecting analog audio sources on page 26 if you want to connect these too H ED fsa S VIDEO Pr Pe NfASSIGN avoi e Bo diri fassin MAp B 400 400 NH NA INE IND INA ING HDMICTRL our REG SEL REC SEL 4 E a a IN A Stow o new n a5 28 22 REC o 7 SEL wE ZONE2 OUT p sD OOO O B 0 For LD WOOFER hi aie INE TAPE VIDEO NA NE a a MD VCR 2 aki D 00000000 0 0000H ing 2 4 LBJ _ CD IN OVRVCRL a NEI G DVD LD ovon cp Tus leans IN ASSIGN s w ABLE A ne 3 13 5 DVR VCR 2 D IN y S x sD i r Ine n MONITOR aE ap DVR Vv L UT 1 VCR 2 a IN ap Pe mE 2 IDEO SaM L SUR SAT COMPONENT D ORNO cp ing lo 12V TRIGGER ONTROL ab CDR D cun VIDEO aD s MD en 1 GAMEI K K K K OPTICAL 1 2 3 4 a Ee PRE OUT ie a AUDIO a l a AUDIO a VIDEO DC OUT 12V TOTAL 250 mA MAX IR Co Me Ld CD R MD DAT etc 1 Connect an optical type digital audio output on your digital component to the OPTICAL IN 6 CD R TAPE MD input Use an optical cable for the connection 2 For r
93. D Cancel 10 Next Cancel If you see an error message ERR in the right side column or the speaker configuration displayed isn t correct there may be a problem with the speaker connection If selecting RETRY doesn t work turn off the power and check the speaker connections If there doesn t seem to be a problem you can simply use to select the speaker and to change the setting and number for surround back and continue 7 Make sure OK is selected then press ENTER A progress report is displayed on screen while the amplifier outputs more test tones to determine the optimum amplifier settings for channel level soeaker distance and Acoustic Calibration EQ D i DVD LD 55 0dB VD LD 1 Auto MCACC 1 Auto MCACC Now Analyzing Now Analyzing 6 10 Subwoofer Check Surround Analysis Speaker System OK Channel Level OK gt Speaker Distance Cancel 4 Cancel Again try to be as quiet as possible while this is happening It may take 3 to 7 minutes e f you selected a Stand Wave Multi Point setup in step 2 you will be asked to place the mic at the 2nd and 3rd reference points before finally placing it at your main listening position 8 The Auto MCACC Setup has finished Press RETURN to go back to the System Setup menu DVD LD 55 00B 5a MCACC Data Check 1 Speaker Setting 2 Channel Level 3 Speaker Distance 4 Standing Wave 5 Acoustic Cal E Q
94. DIA cD o cD cp INPUT SELECT 1 Switch on your system components and amplifier Start by switching on the playback component for example a DVD player your TV and subwoofer if you have one then the amplifier oress AV AMPLIFIER e Make sure the setup mic is disconnected 2 Select the input source you want to play You can use the input source buttons on the remote control INPUT SELECT or the front panel INPUT SELECTOR dial 3 Press AUTO DIRECT AUTO SURROUND STREAM DIRECT to select AUTO SURROUND and start playback of the source If you re playing a Dolby Digital or DIS surround sound DVD disc you should hear surround sound If you are playing a stereo source you will only hear sound from the front left right speakers in the default listening mode e See also Listening to your system on page 34 for information on different ways of listening to sources It is possible to check on the LCD whether or not multi channel playback is being performed properly When using a Surround back speaker Dolby Digital EX is displayed when playing Dolby Digital signals and DTS Neo 6 is displayed when playing DIS 5 1 channel signals When not using a surround back speaker Dolby Digital is displayed when playing Dolby Digital signals 1 You can also choose to view the settings from the MCACC Data Check screen See Automatic MCACC Expert on page 40 for more on this 2 e Depending on the characterist
95. E Otherwise simply choose the next command in the sequence PRES KEY flashes after you press ENTER 6 If necessary press the input source button for the component whose command you want to input This is only necessary if the command is for a new component input source 7 Select the button for the command you want to input The following remote control commands can be selected _ AUDIO VIDEO PARAMETER PARAMETER TOP MENU MENU AvamPLiFier MAIN cD SOURCE ZONE2 3 MULTI OPERATION INPUT SELECT SETUP STATUS CH LEVEL C gt Caa u Cu C AOA pIRDOL STANDARD ADV SURR SIGNALSEL SLEEP DIMMER AUDIO LJ SBch_ PHASE iPod CTRL 4 65 6 A ATT GENRE HDMIOUT g w a 2 G CH CLR_ MCACC 0 e C TV CONTROL e You don t need to program the amplifier to switch on or off This is done automatically With Pioneer components you don t need to e program the power to switch off in a shutdown sequence except DVD recorders e program the power to switch on if it s the source component selected in step 3 e program a Pioneer TV or monitor to switch on if the input function selected in step 2 has video input terminals These take priority in multi operations not shutdown 8 Repeat steps 5 to 7 to program a sequence of up to five commands 9 When you re finished use f to select EXIT from the menu and press ENTER You will return to the remote c
96. EING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES ORA FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms or alternatively under the terms of the ordinary General Public License To apply these terms attach the following notices to the library It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found lt one line to give the library s name and an idea of what it does gt Copyright C year name of author This library is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 1 of the License or at your option any later version This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU Lesser General Publ
97. ER DEEE E EE EEE A SR Setup for Pioneer plasma televisions 97 SIS HEAL aaae N T T eres ane er ae 117 Select the OSD display s background pattern Professional Calibration EQ graphical output 118 MIS Dla NMAC woot ci odo ge utes Hae o aA 98 DeD aaae hehe te tation Sed ee tae ea wins 118 ReMOLCONMOs 44atcaxeerwa Pee eee oa BE Pa ws 119 11 Using other functions LLINK interface aaua 119 SCUIMG INE AUCIO OPUN S sinc enna wee oo e Pete Adjusting the surround B speaker delay Important information regarding Cum DEA sock ese ne sso A been ead 101 me RDM CONNEC UON aa nn TEETAN 121 SENI ENA TO ON chan eed EEES wee Be 101 HOME MEDIA GALLERY opi 121 Making an audio or a video recording 102 IPOd MESSAGES ee 123 Playing a different source when recording 102 ILINK messages car persia Saar oe Skea 123 Reducing the level of an analog signal 103 Meaning of messages displayed when Using the sleep timer oo ccc cc ccc cevcceeevee 103 the HDMI control function is setto ON 123 Switching the contents displayed onthe LCD 103 HOME MEDIA GALLERY messages 0 001s 124 Dimming the display oaao aaa a 103 SUMOUTIE Sound Onn E teu a tena a a eda 125 Switching the HDMI output oaaao 103 DODY sineibe wan nan sew eraskina diaii 125 Checking the settings of the sound DTS ieee ne 126 currently playing tC oo cscvcceeveceeveeeeee 104 Windows Media Audio 9 Professional 126 Resetting Ne sys
98. ER in step 6 e With error messages Such as Too much ambient noise or Check Microphone select RETRY after checking for ambient noise see Problems when using the Auto MCACTC Setup on page 13 and verifying the mic connection If there doesn t seem to be a problem you can simply select GO NEXT and continue 1 Switch on the amplifier and your TV 2 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the front panel Place the microphone so that it s about ear level at your normal listening position use a tripod if possible Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone DVD LD 0 0dB DVD LD 1 Auto MCACC 1 Auto MCACC e Push down on the lower portion of the front panel pe ene Tess door to access the MCACC SETUP MIC jack Environment Check SurrA YES Ambient Noise OK Surr B YES gt Microphone Speaker YES NO SB YESx2 SW YESx2 SA OK Cancel 10 Next Cancel The configuration shown on screen should reflect the actual speakers you have K Note 1 You can t use the System Setup menu in either the main or sub zone when the iPod or HOME MEDIA GALLAERY input source is selected When you set ZONE 2 ZONE 3 or ZONE 2 amp 3 to ON page 66 you can t use the System Setup menu e f you cancel the Auto MCACC Setup or leave an error message for over three minutes the screen saver will appear 2 e The setting you
99. Home Media Gallery complies with DLNA version 1 0 and PlaysForSure version 1 21 If your media server supports different DLNA and or PlaysForSure version s some Home Media Gallery function s and content format s may not be supported Supported formats and contents are subject to change Visit the Pioneer website for updated information http www pioneer eu The Home Media Gallery functions as a WMDRM10 ND Microsoft Windows Media DRM for networked devices Content can only be navigated from the media servers that support WMDRM10 ND The system may not be able to display content from incompatible memory cards You cannot use the Home Media Gallery until dimmed elements on the menu screen turn white Some Home Media Gallery functions such as trick play during Fast Forward and Rewind Time Search and Search may not work depending on the media server s capability and functionality Note 1 With Windows Media Connect or Windows Media Player 11 you can even play back copyrighted audio files on this amplifier En Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs Connecting to the network through LAN interface oO Caution e Before making or changing the connections switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet Plugging in should be the final step SC LX90 m Ges G LAN cable Sold separately BLL J LAN cable sold separately to LAN port zj to LAN port A By
100. Ix MUSIC THX OO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE MUSIC THX CINEMA Straight decoding THX Ultra2 CINEMA Straight decoding THX CINEMA Maximum 5 1 channel playback with only one surround back speaker Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX THX SURROUND EX Dolby Digital EX 6 1 channel flagged Da Pro Logic IIx MOVIE DO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE DTS ES 6 1 channel sources 6 1 channel flagged Other 5 1 channel sources 5 1 channel encoding SACD 5 1 channel encoding SACD 5 1 channel Other 5 1 6 1 7 1 channel SOUrcesS DTS ES Matrix Discrete Straight decoding As above a Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected b This can be selected when only one surround speaker is connected c Automatically selected if no surround back speakers are connected En DTS ES THX Matrix Discrete DTS ES Matrix Discrete THX Ultra2 CINEMA Straight decoding THX CINEMA Straight decoding THX Ultra2 MUSIC Straight decoding THX Music Straight decoding THX MUSIC Straight decoding THX CINEMA As above THX MUSIC THX GAMES Additional information CH Stream direct with different input signal formats The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats depending on the Stream Direct mode see Using Stream Direct on page 36 you have selected Stereo 2 channel signal formats Surround Back speaker s Input signal format DIRECT PURE DIRECT Connected Not connected
101. My Playlist or Setup f then ENTER e To return to the previous screen press RETURN 08 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs e To exit Home Media Gallery select other input source L Server XXXXXX Navigating the files and folders By selecting Media Navigator the previously selected server menu is automatically displayed on the screen by default page 85 When only one server is found the system automatically connects the server You can also use the Tool Menu to switch to another server or manually select a server from the Server List The display is automatically changed to a server list if there are no previously navigated servers 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed 2 Select Media Navigator then ENTER A server menu appears The file folder configuration may vary depending on the server selected After selecting a category folder or container and navigating on subsequent screens you can find a file and start the appropriate Player depending on the selected file 3 Select the desired folder to navigate or file content to play or f then ENTER 4 Press ENTER to display a subsequent screen Subsequent screen appears To return to the previous screen press RETURN To exit Home Media Gallery select other input source Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs CH Selectable screen display Menu display options are List Thumbnail o
102. Navigator To edit a Playlist use the Tool Menu page 75 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed 2 Select My Playlist then ENTER 3 Select a Playlist list from Movie Playlist Music Playlist or Photo Playlist then ENTER 4 Select the desired content or T then ENTER The menu can be displayed as a List Thumbnail or Thumbnail List screen Press ADV SURR Yellow then select Change view from the Tool Menu then ENTER 5 Press ENTER to play or display To return to the previous screen press RETURN To exit Home Media Gallery select other input source Enjoying movie files You can display the menu as a List Thumbnail or Thumbnail List screen Press ADV SURR Yellow then select an option under Change view on the Tool Menu You can also navigate through the subsequent or preceding menu levels in the server or USB device by pressing or ENTER When you select movie content from the server menu on the Media Navigator screen the Movie Player automatically launches Select a category folder or device to access the submenu containing the required file or content The Movie Player screen appears when you select a movie file from My Playlist just like selecting a file in the server Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs Screen Components LRES ea 11 Movie icon Title File name etc Date Album name Play time
103. OUT SOURCE OUT digital output on the rear of this jacks both on the rear of this amplifier amplifier The amplifier must have an optical digital input to make this connection This will allow you to hear the digital output of a component in a second sub zone Sub zone ZONE 3 Main zone aupi0 saoo 5400 IN oo D L o INI oun m GSE Ine Na Ng Ng inv NG taomictrt our 2 A AA AA AA EA es es IN OUT IN DIGITAL IN AUDIO IN Using the MULTI ZONE controls The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust 2 Press CTRL to select the sub zone s you want the sub zone volume and select sources See MULTI If you selected ZONE 2 ON and ZONE 3 ON above you ZONE remote controls on page 67 can toggle among ZONE 2 ZONE 3 and ZONE 2 amp 3 eases e When the amplifier is on make sure that any S S operations for the sub zone are done while ZONE and your selected sub zone s show in the display If this is not showing the front panel controls affect the main zone only 3 Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source for the zone you have selected For example ZONE 2 CD R sends the source connected to the CD R inputs to the primary ZONE 2 sub room 4 Use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the volume This is only possible if you selected the VARIABLE volume control in ZONE Audio Set
104. Other Setup menu En Using other functions cH Chapter 11 Using other functions Setting the Audio options There are a number of additional sound settings you can make using the AUDIO PARAMETER menu The defaults if not stated are listed in bold A Important e Note that if a setting doesn t appear in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu it is unavailable due to the current source settings and status of the amplifier 1 Press AUDIO PARAMETER 2 Use t to select the setting you want to adjust Depending on the current status mode of the amplifier certain options may not be able to be selected Check the table below for notes on this 3 Use to set it as necessary See the table below for the options available for each setting 4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu Setting What it does Option s MCACC Selects your favorite MCACC preset M1 MEMORY 1 MCACC memory when multiple preset to preset memories are saved When a M6 MEMORY 6 MCACC preset memory has been Default renamed the name given is M1 MEMORY 1 displayed eee a MCACC OFF EQ Switches on off the effects of EQ ON Acoustic Pro only for the MCACC preset b Calibration memory selected This setting is OFF EQ available for each MCACC preset memory STAND WAVE Switches on off the effects of ON Standing Standing Wave Control only for the OFF Wave MCACC preset memory selected This setting is available for each MCACC preset mem
105. P THROUGH OFF ON Oto 7 Default 3 3 to 3 Default 0 OFF ON Setting What it does Option s CENTER Adjusts the center image to create a 0 to 10 IMAGE wider stereo effect with vocals Defaults Center Adjust the effect from 0 all center Neo 6 MUSIC Image channel sent to front right and left 3 Applicable Speakers to 10 center channel sent Neo 6CINEMA onlywhen to the center speaker only 10 using a center speaker EFFECT Sets the effect level for the currently 10 to 90 selected Advanced Surround mode each mode can be set separately a When MCACC OFF is selected all MCACC preset memories become deactivated b When EQ OFF is selected the MCACC indicator does not light even when a MCACC preset memory is selected c The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON d The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals Select MAX or MID for signals other than Dolby TrueHD e In the cases described below Surr B DELAY cannot be selected and the effect is turned off even if a value is set When the Output Setup is set to anything other than Normal When surround B Surr B is set to NO at the speaker settings When the speaker system A B is set to anything other than A B ON When using headphones When in the pure direct mode When the audio adjustment function s HDMI audio output is set to THROUGH f You shouldn t have any problems using this with most SA
106. Pioneer Operating Instructions IMPORTANT CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol CAUTION within an equilateral triangle is intended to TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC alert the user to the presence of uninsulated SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and dangerous voltage within the product s BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons maintenance servicing instructions in the INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED literature accompanying the appliance SERVICE PERSONNEL D3 4 2 1 1_En A Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel IMPORTANT THE MOULDED PLUG This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience A 10 amp fuse is fitted in this plug Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 10 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or Check for the ASTA mark amp or the BSI mark Y on the body of the fuse BSI to BS1362 lf the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced If you lose the fuse
107. Proceed to Positioning and connecting the speakers on page 10 Normal surround connections default setting Subwoofer left L Surround left A SL A right R Surround right A SR oi Surround Surround left B SL B right B SR B Surround back Surround back left SBL right SBR Features Connections can be made in the ways from 2 channels for stereo playback to 5 1 the basic requirement for a home theater or 7 1 channels and on this amplifier it is even possible to connect 9 2 channels With 9 1 channel or 9 2 channel connections two surround speakers are used on each of the left and right sides a speaker layout similar to that used in movie theaters Furthermore the set can be used for both movies and for high sound quality multi channel music sources such as SACD and DVD Audio discs Speakers used Total maximum 9 2 front 1 center 4 Surround 2 Surround back Applicable listening rooms The conditions in any listening room can be accommodated but when using 9 2 channels of speakers ideally the space should be large enough for the speakers Output Setup Normal Note 5 2 channel Bi amp connections Subwoofer ee fen Center C right R left L Surround Surround left SL right SR g ow B bi amp compatible speakers Features he front center and surround channels are all reproduced with high quality bi amp Fewer speakers are used than wi
108. R 487 488 489 or 493 e When using a Pioneer plasma television released prior to summer 2005 please select preset codes 637 or 660 3 The remote can store about 200 preset codes this has been tested with codes of Pioneer format only Controlling the rest of your system 3 Press the input source button for the component you want to control then press ENTER PRES KEY shows in the LCD display 4 Point the two remote controls towards each other then press the button that will be doing the learning on this amplifier s remote control PRES KEY starts flashing to indicate the remote is ready to accept a signal e The remote controls should be 3 cm to 5 cm apart 3 cm to 5 cm gt 5 Press the corresponding button on the other remote control that is sending teaching the signal to this amplifier s remote control For example if you want to learn the playback control signal press and hold gt briefly The LCD display will show OK if the operation has been learned If for some reasons the operation hasn t been learned the LCD will display ERROR briefly and then display PRES KEY again If this happens keep pressing the teaching button as you vary the distance between the two remotes until the LCD display shows OK Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be learned from other remote controls The buttons available are shown below AV AMPLIFIER MAIN i
109. S THX CINEMA THX MUSIC THX GAMES selects 6 1 7 1 channel decoding DTS HD Master Audio DTS HD DTS EXPRESS WMA9 Pro 88 2 kHz 96 kHz Dolby Digital Surround Stereo playback As above OO Pro Logic Ilx MOVIE DO Pro Logic Ilx MUSIC DO Pro Logic IIx GAME Do PRO LOGIC Neo 6 CINEMA DO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE THX OO Pro Logic Ilx MUSIC THX MUSIC OO Pro Logic IIx GAME THX GAMES Neo 6 CINEMA THX THX Ultra2 GAMES Neo 6 MUSIC THX MUSIC D0 PRO LOGIC THX CINEMA SACD Neo 6 MUSIC THX MUSIC OO Pro Logic IIx MUSIC THX MUSIC Other stereo sources OO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE OO Pro Logic IIx MUSIC OO Pro Logic IIx GAME OO PRO LOGIC Neo 6 CINEMA DO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE Neo 6 MUSIC Neo 6 CINEMA Stereo playback DO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE THX OO Pro Logic Ilx MUSIC THX MUSIC Stereo playback DO Pro Logic IIx GAME THX GAMES Neo 6 CINEMA THX THX Ultra2 GAMES Neo 6 MUSIC THX MUSIC D0 PRO LOGIC THX CINEMA Neo 6 MUSIC Neural THX EE Additional information En SBch Processing SBch Processing OFF Input signal format Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD WMA9 Pro 44 1 kHz 48 kHz DTS HD Master Audio DTS HD DTS EXPRESS WMA9 Pro 88 2 kHz 96 kHz Dolby Digital Surround DTS Surround Surround Other stereo sources Standard DO Pro Logic Il MOVIE OO Pro Logic Il MUSIC DO Pro Logic Il GAME Do PRO LOGIC Stereo playback DO Pro Logic Il MOVIE OO Pro Logic Il MUSIC OO Pr
110. Surround Straight decoding Dolby Digital EX OO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE Straight decoding Straight decoding Dolby Digital EX OO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE DTS ES Matrix Discrete EE Additional information SBch Processing SBch Processing ON 7 1 channel decoding used for all sources SBch Processing AUTO Automatically selects 6 1 7 1 channel decoding SBch Processing OFF Input signal format DTS and DTS 96 24 5 1 channel encoding Dolby Digital WMA9 Pro 44 1 kHz 48 kHz PCM 5 1 channel encoding SACD 5 1 channel encoding Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD DTS HD DTS HD Master Audio WMA9 Pro PCM 6 1 7 1 channel Dolby TrueHD 176 4 kKHz 192 kHz 5 1 channel Standard DTS Neo 6 DTS D0 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE DTS D0 Pro Logic Ilx MUSIC Dolby Digital EX D0 Pro Logic Ilx MOVIE OO Pro Logic IIx MUSIC Dolby Digital EX o0 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE OO Pro Logic Ilx MUSIC Straight decoding Straight decoding THX Auto Surround DTS Neo 6 THX CINEMA DTS Neo 6 DTS D0 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE THX THX Ultra2 CINEMA THX Ultra2 MUSIC THX Ultra2 GAMES DTS Neo 6 THX MUSIC DTS Neo 6 THX GAMES o0 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC THX THX SURROUND EX Dolby Digital EX D0 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE THX OO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE THX Ultra2 CINEMA THX Ultra2 MUSIC THX Ultra2 GAMES O0 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC THX Do EX THX GAMES THX Ultra2 MUSIC Dolby Digital EX DO Pro Logic I
111. To achieve this non free programs must be allowed to use the library A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non free libraries In this case there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only so we use the Lesser General Public License In other cases permission to use a particular library in non free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software For example permission to use the GNU C Library in non free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system as well as its variant the GNU Linux operating system Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users freedom it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow Pay close attention to the difference between a work based on the library and a work that uses the library The former contains code derived from the library whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run GNU Lesser General Public License TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized
112. Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust and dirt e When the surface is dirty wipe with a soft cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six times with water and wrung out well and then wipe again with a dry cloth Do not use furniture wax or cleansers Never use thinners benzine insecticide sprays or other chemicals on or near this unit since these will corrode the surface Our philosophy Pioneer is dedicated to making your home theater listening experience as close as possible to the vision of the moviemakers and mastering engineer when they created the original soundtrack We do this by focusing on three important steps 1 Achieving the highest possible sound quality 2 Allowing for customized acoustic calibration according to any listening area 3 Fine tuning the amplifier with the help of world class studio engineers 1 With the cooperation of AIR Studios this amplifier has been designated AIR Studios Monitor Reference AIR STUDIOS MONITOR REFERENCE Features e Direct Energy HD Amplifier Through a collaboration Pioneer and ICEpower have jointly development a unique class D amplifier called a Direct Energy High Fidelity Class D HD amplifier This new generation reference amplifier offers outstanding performance high output of 1400 W simultaneous high response and low distortion of 0 005 with high sound quality and reproduces the latest in multi channel digi
113. Use to connect the supplied microphone 24 SETUP Press to access the System Setup menu page 40 25 RETURN Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen 26 VIDEO GAME 2 INPUT See Connecting a component to the front panel inputs on page 26 Operating range of remote control unit The remote control may not work properly if e There are obstacles between the remote control and the amplifier s remote sensor e Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the remote sensor e The amplifier is located near a device that is emitting infrared rays e The amplifier is operated simultaneously with another infrared remote control unit KD Controls and displays En Remote control 1 p AV AMPLIFIER Bin SOURCE l ZONE2 3 ly 2 MULTI 12 e____anaaan OPERATION HOME MEDIA INPUT SELECT 4 13 SIGNALSEL SLEEP DIMMER AUDIO Li SR SBch PHASE iPod CTRL 4 ts 6 A ATT GENRE HDMIOUT G5 w a o CLR MCACC Ce 0 e E The remote has been conveniently color coded according to component control using the following system e White amplifier control TV Control e Blue Other controls 1 MULTI ZONE operation selector switch Switch to perform operations in the main zone zone 2 and zone 3 page 64 2 AV AMPLIFIERO This switches between standby and on for this amplifier 3 MULTI OPERATION Use this button to perform multi operations page 108 4 In
114. a 50 mA max x4 Use to switch components in your system on and off according to the input function of the amplifier See Switching components on and off using the 12 volt trigger on page 67 Sl e When storing optical cable coil loosely The cable may be damaged if bent around sharp corners 15 Component video inputs x5 Use the inputs to connect any video source that has component video output such as a DVD recorder See Using the component video jacks on page 24 16 MULTI ZONE component video output Use to connect monitors or TVs in a separate room See MULTI ZONE listening on page 64 17 Control input output Use to connect other Pioneer components so that you can control all your equipment from a single IR remote Sensor See Operating other Pioneer components with this unit s sensor on page 111 18 RS 232C connector Use for connection to a PC for graphical output when using Advanced MCACC or Full Band Phase Control See Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACTC output on page 69 19 Remote inputs outputs MULTI ZONE and source Use for connection to an external remote control sensor for use in a MULTI ZONE setup for example See Connecting an IR receiver on page 67 Note 1 You must assign the input source to the S Video input to which you ve connected your video component see The Input Setup menu on page 94 En En Connecting your equipment e For optimal video performance THX
115. ade using the e Despite level adjustments being made the filters used for analysis may not display these adjustments in Manual MCACT setup on the graphical output However these adjustments are taken this into account by the filters dedicated to page 44 do not appear to change overall system calibration the graphical output Lower frequency response e Low frequencies used in bass management the subwoofer channel will not change for speakers that curves do not seem to have been have been specified as SMALL in the configuration or do not output these frequencies calibrated for SMALL speakers e Calibration is performed but due to your speakers low frequency limitations no measurable sound is output for display Graphical output data seems to If the power is switched off the measurement data for graphical output to a PC is cleared have disappeared Display Symptom Remedy The display is dark or off e Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness After making an adjustment the Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness display goes off You can t get DIGITAL to display Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are assigned correctly see The nput when using the SIGNAL SEL Setup menu on page 94 button e If the multichannel analog inputs are selected select a different input source DOLBY DIGITAL or DTS does not DOLBY DIGITAL or DTS does no
116. age 54 e X Curve Adjust the tonal balance of your speaker system for movie soundtracks page 54 e THX Audio Setting Specify whether you are using a THX speaker setup page 54 3 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen PA Note 1 If you re using a THX speaker setup set all soeakers to SMALL Speaker Setting Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration size number of speakers and crossover frequency It is a good idea to make sure that the settings made in Automatically setting up for surround sound MCACC amp Full Band Phase Control on page 11 are correct Note that this setting applies to all MCACC presets and cannot be set independently 1 Select Speaker Setting from the Manual SP Setup menu 55 0dB DVD LD 6a Speaker Setting Front lt p gt Center SMALL SurrA SMALL 2858 DVD LD 6 Manual SP Setup b Channel Level c Speaker Distance SurrB SMALL d X Curve SB SMALLx2 e THX Audio Setting Sw YESx2 a g X OVER 80Hz THX ALL SMALL Return Return 2 Choose the set of speakers that you want to set then select a speaker size Use to select the size and number of each of the following speakers e Front Select LARGE if your front speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively or if you didn t connect a subwoofer Select SMALL to send the bass frequencies to the subw
117. aker NO Save SYMMETRY to M1 MEMORY 1 Speaker Setting Channel Level Speaker Distance EQ Pro amp S Wave FULL BAND PHASE CTRL AICUSTOM 3 START Return ENTER Next Cancel ENTER Next Return Main listening position e Custom Menu The default is ALL recommended but you can limit the system calibration to only one setting to save time if you want The available options are ALL Keep SP System Speaker Setting Channel Level Speaker Distance and EQ Pro amp S Wave When you re finished settings the options press RETURN to go back to the Auto MCACC main setup Note 1 Except in cases where you are only adjusting one parameter i e channel level from the CUSTOM setup screen step 2 2 If you are planning to select any options other than Normal read through Speaker output setting on page 43 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 3 3 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions Simply choose an unused preset for now you can rename it later in Data Management on page 50 4 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to SYMMETRY Select CUSTOM to save other correction curves such as ALL CH ADJUST and FRONT ALIGN 5 Select DEMO and then press ENTER to activate the demo mode of Auto MCACC In the demo mode no settings are saved and no errors occur When the speaker
118. akers are steady and leave at least 10 cm from the surrounding walls Position the speakers attentively so that the speakers on the left and right are at equal angles from the listening position center of the adjustments We recommend using cords etc when adjusting the layout Ideally all the speakers should be equidistant from the listening position CF tip e Ifthe speakers cannot be set at equal distances ona circle use the Auto MCACC Setup speaker distance correction and Fine Speaker Distance functions to make them equalize the distance artificially Step 2 Adjusting the speaker height Adjust the heights angles of the different speakers Adjust so that the front speaker units reproducing mid and high frequencies is roughly at the height of the ears If the center speaker cannot be set at the same height as the front speakers adjust its angle of elevation to point it to the listening position Set surround speaker 1 so that it is not under the height of the ears Step 3 Adjusting the speaker orientation If the left and right speakers are not pointing in the same direction the tone will not be the same on the right and left and as a result the sound field will not be reproduced properly However if all the speakers are pointed towards the listening position the sound field will seem cramped Testing by the Pioneer Multi channel Research Group has shown that a good sense of sound positioning can be achieved by
119. all preset remote control preset codes and programmed buttons 4 1 While pressing the MULTI OPERATION button press SETUP The remote LCD display shows SETUP 2 Use f to select RESET then press ENTER RESET flashes in the LCD display 3 Press and hold ENTER for about two seconds The LCD shows OK to confirm the remote presets have been erased e The TV CONTROL buttons TVO TV VOL TV CH MUTE and INPUT can only be learned after the operation selection switch is set to TV 2 Note that interference from TVs or other devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the wrong signal 3 Some commands from other remote controls cannot be learned but in most cases the remotes just need to be moved closer together or farther apart e If the remote LCD shows FULL it means the memory is full See Erasing one of the remote control button settings above to erase a programmed button you re not using to free up more memory note that some signals may take more memory than others 4 When Selecting preset codes directly on page 106 are set all the signals learned in the input source buttons are cleared This function is convenient when you want to reset some but not all of input source buttons Confirming preset codes Use this feature to check which preset code is assigned to an input source button 1 While pressing the MULTI OPERATION button press SETUP The remote LCD display shows SETUP 2 Use t
120. alue of the distance actually move the physical positions of the speakers to fine adjust the subwoofer cannot be adjusted The input from the microphone is indicated on the screen Fine adjust the positions of the speakers so that the gauge reading is maximum The detailed distance adjustments that were previously performed by skilled installers by ear can easily be performed watching the gauge on the monitor 1 e If you can t seem to achieve this by adjusting the distance setting you may need to change the angle of your speakers very slightly e For better audibility the subwoofer emits a continuous test tone oscillating pulses are heard from your other speakers Note that it may be difficult to compare this tone with the other speakers in your setup depending on the low frequency response of the reference speaker 06 The System Setup menu En 1 Select Precision Distance from the Manual MCACC setup menu Determine this after connecting the setup microphone DVD LD 3 Manual MCACC 55 0dB DVD LD 20 0dB 3c Precision Distance a Fine Channel Level b Fine SP Distance d Standing Wave CAUTION e EQ Adjust f EQ Professional Please wait 20 Loud test tones will be output O Return Cancel 2 Fine adjust the positions of the speakers in sequence starting from the front right channel Test tones are output trom the speaker for the selected channel and from one other speaker Move the
121. amplifier s input signal is tracks are recorded on the disc displayed on the STATUS screen Symptom Remedy Additional information Symptom Remedy O O O When playing a disc with the e Make sure that the amplifier is set to AUTO or DIGITAL see Choosing the input signal on page 37 listening mode set to Auto e If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing including Dolby Surround encoded then this is not a Surround OO PL II or Neo 6 malfunction Check the disc packaging for details about the audio tracks available appear on the amplifier During playback of a Surround e The source may be Dolby Surround EX DTS ES software but it has no flag to indicate it is 6 1 compatible EX or DTS ES source on the SBch Set to SBch ON see Using surround back channel processing on page 37 then switch to the THX AUTO setting EX or ES does not Surround EX or Standard EX listening mode see Listening in surround sound on page 34 appear or the signal is not properly processed During playback of DVD Audio This will occur when playing DVD Audio material over the HDMI connection This is not a malfunction the display shows PCM Remote control Symptom Remedy Cannot be remote controlled e Try replacing the batteries in the remote control see Loading the batteries on page 7 e Be sure to operate within 7 m and a 30 angle of the remote sensor on the front panel see Operating range of remote control unit on page 31 e Check that th
122. and DVD player 005 Connecting your Blu ray disc player 0 eee Connecting a satellite cable receiver or other settop DOK ii cede soar oc 4 24S a oe eon ak Connecting a DVD HDD recorder VCR and other video SOUICES correer raidai adidas es Using the component video jackS 00005 Connecting digital audio SOUICES 6 eee About the WMAQ Pro decoder 000s Connecting analog audio SOUICES eee eee Connecting a component to fe front panel INPUTS otigw seek ce be ketene Installing your speaker system eee Connecting the Speakers ees Placing the speakers 2 ee THX speaker system SETUP ees Plugging inthe amplifier 0 ccc ee 04 Controls and displays TEENS MS O EEEE TEE EE 30 Operating range of remote control unit 31 Fomo COMO erien tn ee eee es 32 05 Listening to your system PUTO Ola OAC a acorn ota os 5G EREN aor ae 34 Listening iN SUrrouUNd SOUNd siras eee 34 Standard SUrOUNG SOUNG 4 2 4 46n6sanawrew sea 34 Using the Home THX mode S 0 eee es 35 Using the Advanced surround effects ouaaa 39 LISTENING I SICKO 4 inte dvd ie da heck ehed rinia 36 Using Front Stage Surround Advance 05 go Using SiGe DEC acdnd ed hee SOAR AO Re OM 36 selecting WIGCACC DreSelS 241s 04 scene ied ined as of Choosing the input signal cee ee 37 Using surround back channel processing 37 Using the Virtual Surround Back mode 38 Using the genre synchr
123. any files in each folder A server is arbitrarily selected e This arbitrary selection happens when the server you used before had been set to display the top menu screen if you reset it other servers connected are also reset When the Single Server USB option is selected on the Auto Connection Setup screen that follows the Setup menu the server is automatically accessed if only one server is connected Use the Tool Menu to select the proper server See page 78 File folder configuration differs from one server to another strange configuration e The Media Navigator displays the server contents as classified by the server e If no information such as ID3 tag is contained in the file files cannot be classified on the server En Additional information Symptoms Remedy The list could not be acquired Refer to the possible solutions provided for No servers are found appears on the Server List e f the above does not solve the problem try turning AV AMPLIFIER off on the remote control unit then screen turn STANDBY ON on on the amplifier A communication error message Refer to the possible solutions provided for No servers are found appears e f the above does not solve the problem try turning AV AMPLIFIER off on the remote control unit then turn STANDBY ON on on the amplifier Home Media Gallery PLAYBACK Image or sound is interrupted or Check the physical
124. anying uncombined form of the same work You may not copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Library or any work based on the Library you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or moditying the Library or works based on it Each time you redistribute the Library or any work based on the Library the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License If as a consequence of a court judgment
125. at buttons program source LD BD player you can use just the remote sensor of one component VCR When you use a remote control the control signal is Use the number buttons to DVD player passed along the chain to the appropriate component navigate the on screen display Selects channels DVR VCR Se Important ENTER Use as the ENTER button VCR DVD BD player e Note that if you use this feature make sure that you Displays the setup screen for DYR DVR player also have at least one set of analog audio video or players HDMI jacks connected to another component for Changes sides of the LD LD player grounding purposes TOP MENU Displays the disc top menu ofa DVD BD DVR 1 Decide which component you want to use the DVD player player remote sensor of MENU Displays menus concerning the DVD BD DVR When you want to control any component in the chain current DVD or DVR you are using player this is the remote sensor at which you ll point the t Pauses the tape Cassette deck corresponding remote control 4 Stops the tape Cassette deck 2 Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that component ENTER Starts playback Cassette deck to the CONTROL IN jack of another Pioneer component Fast rewinds fast forwards the Cassette deck Use a cable with a mono mini plug on each end for the tape connection t e Navigates DVD menu options DVD BD DVR amp ENTER player CH Selects channels VCR DVD DVR player O O AUDIO Changes the audio language
126. ate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 15 BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 INNO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA B
127. ation modes Normally Type 1 the factory default can be used but with some models of iPods the iPod cannot be controlled from this amplifier unless you switch to Type 2 If Error I3 is displayed when you connect the iPod use the procedure described below to switch to Type 2 1 When this amplifier is in the standby mode press the STANDBY ON button while pressing the SETUP button 2 Select iPod mode lt Type 1 gt on the LCD 3 Select Type 1 or Type 2 then ENTER iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Using the i LINK interface If you have a component with an i LINK connector you can connect it to this amplifier using an i LINK cable Since the i LINK interface does not transmit video signals the video signal of i LINK connected components must be connected with other cables see Connecting your equipment on page 16 for more on making video connections If you ve already hooked up the video signal from the component assign the i LINK input to the input function to which you ve connected the video signals see he nput Setup menu on page 94 See Checking the i LINK inputs on page 59 to confirm your LLINK settings The two i LINK connectors on the rear of your amplifier are 4 pin connectors Use a 4 pin S400 i LINK cable to connect LINK equipped components Note 1 Your iPod nano currently restricts viewing of photo images stored 2 The Video Browse
128. aximized PHASE CONTROL effect e The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 99 Simple Home Theater Guide Ce This amplifier analyzes the frequency phase Full Band Phase Control ON characteristics of the speakers by calibrating test signals output from the speakers with the supplied microphone therefore flattening the analyzed trequency phase es j NAN A A i A l characteristics during audio signal playback the same E correction is made for a pair of left and right speakers Midrange NAA EE This correction minimizes group delay between the A y ranges of a speaker and improves the frequency phase Woofer j Ay S F o characteristics across all ranges a ia AO Furthermore the enhanced frequency phase OEE ai characteristics between channels ensure better MS surround sound integration for multichannel setting Full Band Phase Control OFF With the phase distortion corrected the frequency phase EELSE characteristics are improved across all ranges THERET a tae D Da e ae e Sound with live dynamics Midrange ace Ny r e Sound of musical instruments with superb reality a jj ae e Sound so accurately reproduced that you can even NJ aoo ay
129. ble with HDCP a HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front LCD display Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed but so long as there is no problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction e This amplifier has been designed to be compliant with HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface Version 1 3a Depending on the component you have connected using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers e This amplifier supports SACD Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD and DTS HD Master Audio To take advantage of these formats however make sure that the component connected to this amplifier also supports the corresponding format Connecting your equipment SC LX90 m ee OPTICAL ASSIGNABLE HDMI DVI equipped component 1 Use an HDMI cable to connect one of the HDMI IN interconnects on this amplifier to an HDMI output on your HDMI component The HDMI indicator lights on the front panel when an HDMI equipped component is connected 2 Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT interconnect on this amplifier to an HDMI interconnect on an HDMI compatible monitor e The arrow on the cable connector body should be facing down for correct alignment with the connector f 3 Use the INPUT SELECT button to select the HDMI input you ve connected to for example HDMI 2 You can also perform the same operation by using the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the
130. both movie theatres and in your home theatre as faithful as possible to what the director intended Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres with similar equipment and conditions This Same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc VHS tape DVD etc and is not changed for playback in a small home theatre environment THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur On this product when the THX indicator is on THX features are automatically added in Cinema modes e g THX Cinema THX Surround EX e Re Equalization The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie theaters using very different professional equipment Re Equalization restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a small home environment e Timbre Matching The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the direction from which the sound is coming In a movie theatre there is an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all around you In a home theatre you use only two speakers located to the side of your head The Timbre Matchin
131. both on the rear of this amplifier You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub zone amplifier as shown in the following illustration Sub zone Main zone 2 Connect a separate amplifier to the COAXIAL ZONE2 OUT digital output on the rear of this amplifier The amplifier must have an optical digital input to make this connection This will allow you to hear the digital output of a component in a second sub zone AUDIO IN MULTI ZONE setup using speaker terminals ZONE 2 You must select 7 2ch ZONE 2 in Speaker output setting on page 43 to use this setup Note that the sound in the sub zone will be temporarily interrupted when controlling the main zone for example changing the input source or starting playback Main zone Sub zone 0000 O 10 06 e Connect a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE2 OUT jacks on the rear of this amplifier You should have a pair of soeakers attached to the R5 and L5 terminals as shown below mi DEO AME fis m over En Other connections Secondary MULTI ZONE setup ZONE 3 1 Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE3 2 Connect a separate amplifier to the ZONE3 OUT jacks and a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE3
132. bove Straight decoding a Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected EE Additional information En Cautions on Handing Liquid crystal screen e here may be small black dots or brightly shining spots bright points on the liquid crystal screen This is a particularity of liquid crystal screens and is nota malfunction e When using in cold places the screen may be dark for a while after the power is turned on The brightness will return to normal after a while If the liquid crystal display is exposed to direct sunlight the sunlight will reflect off of it making the display hard to see Block the direct sunlight Liquid crystal backlight e The backlight will reach the end of its service life after approximately 10 000 hours The service life may be shortened if used continuously at high temperatures on a rack or when used continuously in low temperatures When using on a rack be sure to allow for heat dissipation Cleaning the shiny surfaces of the panel and the liquid crystal display window Use the included wiping cloth dry to gently wipe any dirt off the shiny surfaces of this amplifier s panel and the liquid crystal display window Shiny surfaces of panel Liquid crystal display window ACTIVE MONTOR u e B ua o 5 a a R O o o o 06 Notes on handling the included wiping cloth e Using the wiping cloth with dust on
133. by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 9 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 10 Ifyou wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives
134. c circuit this system extracts Surround sound from sources as follows e Dolby Pro Logic 4 1 channel sound mono surround from any stereo source e Dolby Pro Logic Il 5 1 channel sound stereo surround from any stereo source e Dolby Pro Logic IIx 6 1 or 7 1 channel sound stereo Surround and surround back from two channel or 5 1 and 6 1 channel sources With two channel sources the 7 subwoofer channel is generated by bass management in the amplifier Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for enhanced surround listening with greater sound detail Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is the next generation audio technology for all high definition programming and media It combines the efficiency to meet future broadcast demands with the power and flexibility to realize the full audio potential expected in the upcoming high definition era Built on Dolby Digital the multi channel audio standard for DVD and HD broadcasts worldwide Dolby Digital Plus was designed for the next generation A V amplifiers but remains fully compatible with all current A V amplifiers Dolby Digital Plus delivers multi channel audio programs of up to 7 1 channels and supports multiple programs in a single encoded bitstream with the maximum bit rate potential of up to 6 Mbps and the maximum bit rate performance of
135. ccess to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it is called a work that uses the Library Such a work in isolation is not a derivative work of the Library and therefore falls outside the scope of this License However linking a work that uses the Library with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library because it contains portions of the Library rather than a work that uses the library The executable is therefore covered by this License Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables When a work that uses the Library uses material from a header file that is part of the Library the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library or if the work is itself a library The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law If such an object file uses only numerical parameters data structure layouts and accessors and small macros and small inline functions ten lines or less in le
136. ce e f you re using a Subwoofer switch it on and turn up the volume to the middle position 1 Select Manual MCACC from the System Setup menu See Making amplifier settings from the System Setup menu on page 40 if you re not already at this screen DVD LD 55 0dB System Setup MENU 1 Auto MCACC 2 Output Setup 4 FULL BAND PHASE CTRL 5 Data Management 6 Manual SP Setup 7 Input Setup 8 OSD Language 9 Other Setup 55 0dB DVD LD 3 Manual MCACC b Fine SP Distance c Precision Distance d Standing Wave e EQ Adjust f EQ Professional 4 Exit Return 2 Select the setting you want to adjust If you re doing this for the first time you might want to make these settings in order e Fine Channel Level Make fine adjustments to the overall balance of your speaker system see Fine Channel Level below e Fine SP Distance Make precise delay settings for your speaker system see Fine Speaker Distance on page 45 Precision Distance Fine adjusting the positions of the speakers see Fine adjusting the positions of the speakers Precision Distance on page 45 Standing Wave Control overly resonant low frequencies in your listening room see Standing Wave on page 46 The last two settings are specifically for customizing the parameters explained in Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 47 e EQ Adjust Manually adjust the frequency balance of your speaker system while lis
137. ce E EE EE dance ee 92 dB 65 dB Composite Video S Video Section Input Sensitivity Impedance nasaan aana ee 1 Vp p 75 Q Output Level Impedance cee eee 1 Vp p 75 Q SignalteNoise RAO 6 cacao cached doen eum on tridi 65 dB Frequency RESPONSE 6 eee 5 Hz to 10 MHz Component Video Section Input Sensitivity Impedance sanaa cee eee 1 Vp p 75 Q Output Level Impedance eee ee 1 Vp p 75 Q Signalto Noise RATIO i os 0icd db entdws take eww aaa 65 dB Frequency RESPONSE 6 ee ee 5 Hz to 100 MHz Network Section LAN terminal cc cee ee 10 BASE 1T 100 BASE IX USB Section JSB terminalas raare aot wll Baas USB2 0 compatible Miscellaneous Power Requirements AC 220 V to 240 V 50 Hz 60 Hz Power CONSUMDNOM ses ocd eiea iae EE aes 550 W PASTA MOY nao beans rias 0 55 W HDMI Control OFF 0 75 W HDMI Control ON Dimensions 440 W mm x 247 H mm x 479 D mm Weight without package ccc eee eee 35 5 kg Furnished Parts Setup microphone for Auto MCACC setup 0 AA JIEC ROF dry cell batteries 0 es 2 FeMOle COMLPONURIG seriet ratae aa aA i 1 POCORN OCA NA eee A E wee na AR ee 1 PONG COO erarnan ea a a a A aaa a ee 1 E eaa a ae Galak a AEK AE ea 1 Wara Y C eree R a E 1 These operating instructions Note e Specifications and the design are subject to possible modifications without notice due to improvements EE Additional information En Cleaning the unit e
138. channel information already encoded into the source as well as its own processing to determine channel localization with two channel sources the 1 Subwoofer channel is generated by bass management in the amplifier Two modes Cinema and Music are available using DIS Neo 6 with two channel sources DTS 96 24 DTS 96 24 is an extension of the original DTS Digital Surround which offers high quality 96 kHz 24 bit audio using a DIS 96 24 decoder This format is also fully backward compatible with all existing decoders This means that DVD players can play this software using a conventional DTS 5 1 channel decoder DTS EXPRESS DTS EXPRESS is a low bitrate encoding technology supporting up to 5 1 channels with fixed data transfer rates This format is incorporated with sub audio on HD DVD and secondary audio on Blu ray Disc while boasting the potential applicability to upcoming broadcasts and memory audio contents DTS HD Master Audio DTS HD Master Audio is a technology that delivers master audio sources recorded in a professional studio to listeners without any loss of data preserving audio quality DIS HD Master Audio adopts variable data transfer rates facilitating data transfer to the maximum rate of 24 5 Mbps in the Blu ray disc format 18 0 Mbps in the HD DVD format which by far exceeds that of a standard DVD These high data transfer rates enable lossless transmission of 96 kHz 24 bit 7 1 channel audio sources without dete
139. cide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License If the distribution and or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns En EE Additional information En Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Library does not specify a license version number you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 14 If you wish to incorpor
140. connect it to this unit and take advantage of various Convenient features Such as automatic video input switching of the plasma television when the input iS changed n1 Pioneer plasma television A Important e You can t use the SR features when HDMI Control is set to ON Make sure to set HDMI Control to OFF when you use the SR features page 92 e f you connect to a Pioneer plasma television using an SR cable you will need to point the remote control at the plasma television remote sensor to control the amplifier In this case you won t be able to control the amplifier using the remote control if you switch the plasma television off e Before you can use the extra SR features you need to make a few settings in the amplifier See 7he Input Setup menu on page 94 and SR Setup for Pioneer plasma televisions on page 97 for detailed instructions Note e Usea 3 ringed miniplug SR cable to connect the CONTROL IN jack of this amplifier with the CONTROL OUT jack of your plasma television VIDEO INPUT 1 VIDEO 2 Ee ee eee ee OC SS Sq DVD player Satellite receiver etc DVD LD AUDIO IN AUDIO IN Pioneer plasma television This amplitier To make the most of the SR features you should connect your source components DVD player etc in a slightly different way to that described in this chapter For each component connect the video output directly to the plasma television
141. connecting this amplifier to the network via the LAN terminal you can play back files stored on components on the network including your PC Connect the LAN terminal on this amplifier to the LAN terminal on your router with or without the built in DHCP server function with a straight LAN cable CAT 5 or higher Turn on the DHCP server function of your router In case your router does not have the built in DHCP server function it is necessary set up the network manually For details see Network Setup on page 85 The specifications of a LAN terminal LAN PEM acs oe yee ences ee BES Ror eae Ethernet jack 1O0BASE T 100BASE TX Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs CH Using the USB interface It is possible to play back files using the USB interface on the front of this amplifier This amplitier USB mass storage device Confirming the IP Address After making the network connection follow the instructions below to confirm the panel s IP Address before accessing the network The setup is effective for Auto only To perform the procedure DHCP on your server or router must be valid 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed 2 Select Setup t then ENTER 3 Select Network Setup then ENTER 4 Select Automatically acquire IP f then ENTER The screen turns from Select mode to Input mode 5 Select Yes then ENTER The IP Address is automa
142. cting via a broadband router or an Ethernet hub to a media server with network software you can navigate through the digital content on the Home Media Gallery For USB interface this amplifier supports Mass Storage Class devices Referred to as a media server that contains digital content such as movies music and photo files PCs that have pre installed media server software and recorders with a media server function are considered the media server There are some media servers that you can choose from for example Windows Media Connect Windows Media Player that has a media sharing function and DLNA compliant servers Usable free media servers Free media servers available from Microsoft include 1 Windows Media Connect 2 0 Windows Media Connect runs on a 32 bit PC with Windows XP Service Pack 2 SP2 installed When it is already installed you can enjoy Home Media Gallery using your PC 2 Windows Media Player 11 for Windows XP Windows Media Player 11 features Media Sharing that runs on a 32 bit PC with Windows XP Service Pack 2 SP2 installed If Windows Media Connect 2 0 is not installed in your PC you can download Windows Media Player 11 from Microsoft s website 3 Windows Media Player 11 for Windows Vista Windows Media Player 11 will be featured in 32 bit Windows Vista PCs When selecting the most suitable media server please visit Microsoft s website for system requirements known issues installation proc
143. dd to My Adds the selected Playlist files to My Playlist Moves to the Server List screen Stop Music Stops playback of a music file Select Server Change Name Used to change content names in My Playlist Change view Switches the screen display to List Thumbnail or Thumbnail List Starts playback at the preset time on the Movie or Music Player screen Time Search Slow Playback Plays back in the slow mode on the Movie or Music screen BGM Setup Used to set up the slideshow BGM on the Photo Player Move Moves the order of content in My Playlist Delete from Deletes the selected My Playlist content from My Playlist a When a file is selected b While music is played Screen on which Tool Menu is available Server List Media Navigator USB My Playlist Playlist List Movie Music Photo Folder Contents List Contents List Photo Player Folder Contents List Contents List Movie Player Music Player Photo Player Media Navigator Folder Contents List Contents List Server List Media Navigator Playlist List Movie Music Photo Folder Contents List Contents List Music Player Photo Player Playlist List Movie Music Photo Folder Contents List Contents List Movie Player Music Player Movie Player Photo Player Contents List Playlist Contents List Playlist i Media Navigator While navigating through the folders a media server provides you can select the desired Tile
144. deeute Ronee tees 81 PROFAT Key I a ara ahi ben eg ete ae eo 81 Setna upitie SIGESNOW lt 4ice4 eke Barker 82 setting up BGM tor the slideshow isis cedwie cas 82 Stare MG UNS Sde OW gui dati ot A att deat ata athe ee 83 Rotaung ANG MAGS sts Soca bake oe eee wea ke See 83 Repeating the slideshow 6 cee ee 83 Playing the slideshow at random 005 83 OUer USET Ul TOR WONG eae een Smee aA 83 S e CRM ee Ae re eC rey E ance eee 83 SOUL itis artes E EEES EANES boo dee an aa cate ain 84 Adding tiles TooMy PlayitStc 02 esesecrsaeee ee aos 84 De OG ak Bs ie ote en enters UAE a ne ees 85 SWITC INO AME SEVIER cates Sarge hee hanes eee ees 87 RESCUING OGEIAUI God ra a EAE E ER 87 Oter comenient Tatu eS rir aan a a 87 Confirming the existing Home Media Gallery e EE TE TECE SE EIE E EEE E eS 8 GOS Ae uy ra ta ae ema ee Bie Rote w batts kes 88 DeU Gateways no medias ee hahaa te hl oa ete es 88 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol SS CMTE ee Tee e Ste ee Se eee ere re Te ee eee 88 DLNA Digital Living Network Alliance 88 DNS Domain Name Service Server 88 EM Cle MW nom a Ahad ain wen a E a cede ices hoard a tye 88 IP Internet Protocol Address 00 eee 88 ARNE ADIE C erature bay a ea e Sb eed ee Radek hoes 89 MAC Media Access Control Address 89 Mass Storage Class devices e cccaa sewn Gada a 89 Payo FO Or are tie eas en a ate Rk Ree red 89 SUMS MAS Ged ae celta a AEE webs on 8
145. dent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library s complete source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Library and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The modified work must itself be a software library b You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the Tiles and the date of any change c You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License d Ifafacility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility other than as an argument passed when the facility is inv
146. deo cassettes Dolby The Dolby technologies are explained below See www dolby com for more detailed information DO poLsy TRUEGL Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding system widely used in cinemas and in the home for DVD and digital broadcast soundtracks It can deliver up to six discrete audio channels comprising five full range channels and a special LFE low frequency effects channel used mainly for deep rumbling sound effects hence the term 5 1 channel Dolby Digital In addition to the format features above Dolby Digital decoders offer downmixing for compatibility with mono stereo and Dolby Pro Logic audio from a number of bit rates and channels Another feature called Dialog Normalization attenuates programs based on the average level of dialog in a program relative to its peak level also known as Dialnorm in order to achieve uniform playback level Dolby Digital Surround EX Dolby Digital Surround EX the EX stands for EXtended is an extension of Dolby Digital encoding whereby a surround back channel is matrixed into the surround left right channels for 6 1 channel playback This allows for compatibility with Dolby Digital 5 1 channel decoding as well as for decoding using Dolby Digital EX Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby Pro Logic II and Dolby Pro Logic decoding system Using the innovative steering logi
147. ditional information HDMI Symptom Remedy The HDMI indicator blinks continuously No picture or sound No picture No sound or sound suddenly ceases Noisy or distorted picture HDCP ERROR shows in the display Amp linked operation not possible using HDMI control function e Check all the points below e This amplifier is HDCP compatible Check that the components you are connecting are also HDCP compatible If they are not please connect them using the component S Video or composite video jacks e Depending on the connected source component it s possible that it will not work with this amplifier even if it is HDCP compatible In this case connect using the component S Video or composite video jacks between source and amplifier e Ifthe problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support e If video images do not appear on your TV or plasma television try adjusting the resolution DeepColor or other setting for your component e f NOT SUPPORT appears in the amplifier s display try adjusting the resolution DeepColor or other setting for your component e While analog video signals are being output over HDMI use a separate connection for audio output e When this amplifier reproduces MULTI CH IN audio sources with the HDMI setting set to THROUGH you cannot hear audio output from al
148. e Supported file formats The table below shows supported file formats that can be played back or displayed on this amplifier These formats are applicable to network sources Most of them are also applicable to USB sources However media server content protected by digital rights management such as WMDRM10 Windows Media Digital Rights Management 10 may not play on this amplifier For detailed information about file formats see Details of compatible formats on page 89 Type of files Format Movie MPEG PS mpg mpeg mpe m2p MPEG 2 TS WMV asf wmv MPEG4 mp4 Music MP3 mp3 LPCM WAV wav WMA wma MPEG 4 AAC m4a Photo JPEG jpg joeg BMP bmp PNG png TIFF tif tiff GIF gif e Some formats may not be supported nor displayed on Home Media Gallery as formats that individual media servers Support vary Refer to the manufacturer s or other relevant website for supported formats on your media server Even with the format included in the above table some functions may not operate properly depending on the content Even with the format included in the above table some files may not be played properly through a USB device Note Content may not play or display properly depending on the conditions of use Sources for this amplifier include media servers running on the LAN network or SD Card MS MMC xD Picture and CF that comply with the Mass Storage File System through a USB interface
149. e e 10dB Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level increased by 10 dB DVD LD 55 0dB 9a Multi Ch In Setup SW Input Gain lt EEEE gt Video Input DVD Finish 3 Select the Video Input setting you want When the multi channel input is selected as an input source you can display the video images of other input sources The video input can be selected from the following DVD LD BD TV SAT DVR VCR 1 DVR VCR 2 VIDEO GAME 1 VIDEO GAME 2 OFF DVD LD 55 0dB 9a Multi Ch In Setup SW Input Gain 10dB Video Input MT Finish 4 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Other Setup menu ZONE Video Setup 1 Select ZONE Video Setup from the Other Setup menu DVD LD 55 0dB DVD LD 55 0dB 9 Other Setup 9b ZONE Video Setup a Multi Ch In Setup b ZONE Video Setup c ZONE Audio Setup ZONE 2 VIDEO CONV BLON ig d SR Setup e HDMI Control Setup f i LINK Check g Display Image O Return Other Settings 2 Select whether to set ZONE 2 VIDEO CONV to ON or OFF e ON The composite video or S Video input signals are converted with respect to COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE OUT or VIDEO ZONE2 OUT This way video signals can be output even if the input device and the ZONE2 TV monitor are connected with different types of cables e OFF he ZONE video output is not converted In this case connect the input device and ZONE2 TV monit
150. e iPod mini iPod nano or iPod Photo e For detailed instructions on using the iPod please refer to the manual supplied with the iPod Other connections 3 Set the operation selector switch to SOURCE and then press TOP MENU button to display iPod Top menu When the display shows Top Menu you re ready to play music from the iPod e f the display shows No Connection after pressing iPod try switching off the amplifier and reconnecting the iPod to the amplifier e f the display shows Error I3 after pressing iPod set the iPod operation mode to Type 2 See Switching the iPod operation mode on page 58 IPod playback To navigate songs or videos on your iPod you can take advantage of the OSD of your TV connected to this amplifier You can also control all operations for music or videos in the front LCD display of this amplifier Finding what you want to play When your iPod is connected to this amplifier you can browse songs or videos stored on your iPod by playlist artist album name song name video name genre or composer similar to using your iPod directly e Example of top menu for iPods compatible with the Video Browse function Videos e Example of top menu for iPods not compatible with the Video Browse function iPod 55 0dB Music ET Artists Albums Songs Podcasts Genres Composers Audiobooks Shuffle Songs AVENTER 1 When Video Browse compatible Use the f 4
151. e BD input function if you make this connection 2 If your Blu ray disc player only has an optical digital output you can connect it to one of the optical inputs on this amplifier using an optical cable When you set up the amplifier you ll need to tell the amplifier which input you connected the player to see The System Setup menu on page 40 En 03 Connecting your equipment Connecting a satellite cable receiver or other set top box Satellite and cable receivers and terrestrial digital TV tuners are all examples of so called set top boxes SC LX90 s E S VIDEO rs PR ow Ps SY re 5 LO a 000 i0 a ZONES AP 2 oa a a STB 1 Connect the audio video outputs on the set top box to the SAT AUDIO and VIDEO inputs Connect using a stereo RCA phono jack cable and a video or S Video cable 2 Connect an optical type digital audio output from your set top box to the OPTICAL IN 2 SAT input Use an optical cable for the connection K Note 1 See The Input Setup menu on page 94 to assign the S VIDEO input to the SAT input function if you make this connection 2 If your set top box only has a coaxial digital output you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this amplifier using a coaxial digital audio cable When you set up the amplifier you ll need to tell the amplifier which input you connected the set top box to see The Input Setup menu on page 94 3 If your satell
152. e playback speed by pressing while in the slow mode To discontinue slow playback press ENTER or gt The system returns to the normal playback mode Note e This function may not be supported depending on the content Add to My Playlist 1 While navigating or playing select the file to be added to My Playlist then ENTER 2 Press ADV SURR Yellow then select Add to My Playlist from the Tool Menu 4 then ENTER A Playlist Selection dialog screen appears 3 Select a Playlist then ENTER A check mark is provided beside the selected Playlist When you select a different Playlist and press ENTER the mark jumps to the new Playlist from the previously selected one Playlist Selection Select a Playlist to register Playlistl Playlist2 Playlist3 Playlist4 Playlist5 4 Select OK then ENTER The file is added to the selected Playlist To cancel the operation select Cancel then press ENTER Fast Forward Fast Reverse e While playing content press and hold for Fast Reverse or press and hold for Fast Forward Forward Reverse 15 sec e While playing content press and hold f or to jump backward or forward in 15 second increments A B Repeat Mode 1 While playing content press AUTO DIRECT Blue where you want repeat to start 2 Press AUTO DIRECT Blue again where you want repeat to end The Player status appears on the screen and the A B mode
153. e the button iS pressed When set to Normal OFF AON E a _ o When set to All CH Bi Amp ON OFF When set to Front Bi Amp ON OFF Note When set to 7 2ch ZONE 2 ON OFF When set to 7 2ch Speaker B OFF AON A B ON an When set to Normal e SP A B ON The surround sound is output from the speakers connected to both A and B e SP A ON The surround sound is only output from the speaker connected to A It is not output from the speaker connected to B e SP BON The surround sound is only output from the speaker connected to B It is not output from the speaker connected to A When set to 7 2ch Speaker B1 e SP A ON The sound is output from all the speakers other than those connected to the L2 and R2 speaker terminals Surround playback is possible e SP B ON Only output from speakers connected to the L2 and R2 speaker terminals Only 2 channel stereo playback possible e SP A B ON The sound of A and B above is output simultaneously When set to All CH Bi Amp or Front Bi Amp e SP ON Output from all speakers When set to 7 2ch ZONE 2 e SP ON The sound selected for the main zone is output from the speakers connected to speaker terminals other than Lb and Rd The sound selected for ZONE 2 is output from the speakers connected to the L5 and R5 speaker terminals Common to all the above settings e SP OFF No sound is output from the speakers
154. e using before updating the software You can check it with the following procedure 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed 2 Select Setup then ENTER 3 Select Home Media Gallery Version then ENTER Jot down the Home Media Gallery Version displayed in the screen Ex software Version 1 0 xxxAVR 4 Select OK to return to the previous screen ENTER 08 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs En Auto Connection Setup For extra convenience you can toggle between the following features Server Single Server USB Last Connected This function stores the server last accessed in the memory allowing direct server access the next time without displaying the Server List screen This function is used only when a USB flash drive or a single server is connected You do not need this function when a multi card reader or two or more servers are connected USB When USB flash drive is connected the Devices List is skipped as long as you have checked in the Single Server USB box If not the list may be displayed at any time Media Navigator Server When a single server is connected the Server List is skipped as long as you have checked in the Single Server USB box If not the list may be displayed at any time When the Last Connected Server box is checked the other server setup option Single Server USB becomes invalid
155. e volume to your liking Make sure that DVD LD is showing in the amplifier s display indicating that the DVD input is selected If it isn t press DVD on the remote control to set the amplifier to the DVD input In addition to the basic playback explained in Playing a source on page 13 there are several other sound options you can select See Listening to your system on page 34 for more on this See also Making amplifier settings from the System Setup menu on page 40 for more setup options 1 After this amplifier is connected to an AC outlet a 15 second HDMI initialization process begins You cannot carry out any operations during this process The HDMI indicator in the front LCD display blinks during this process and you can turn on this amplifier once it has stopped blinking When you set the HDMI Control mode to OFF you can skip this process For details about the HDMI Control feature see HDMI Control on page 91 Simple Home Theater Guide Ce Selecting the speaker layout usage pattern This amplifier is equipped with speaker terminals for 10 channels and the speaker layout usage pattern can be selected to suit the user s tastes There are five speaker layout usage patterns as described below When using this amplifier be sure to select one of the five patterns below before proceeding with the connections settings and playback operations Once you have decided on the speaker layout usage pattern connect the speakers
156. ecording equipment connect one of the optical type DIGITAL outputs to a digital input on the recorder Use an optical cable to connect to the SOURCE OUT or ZONE3 SOURCE OUT Note About the WMA9Q Pro decoder This unit has an on board Windows Media Audio 9 Professional WMASQ Pro decoder so it is possible to playback WMAQ9 Pro encoded audio using a coaxial or optical digital connection when connected to a WMA9 Pro compatible player However the connected PC DVD player set top box etc must be able to output WMA9 Pro format audio signals through a coaxial or optical digital output 1 If your digital component only has a coaxial digital output you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this amplifier using a coaxial cable When you set up the amplifier you ll need to tell the amplifier which input you connected the component to see also The nput Setup menu on page 94 e The digital outputs from other components can be connected to any spare digital audio inputs on this amplifier You can assign them when setting up the amplifier see also The nout Setup menu on page 94 2 e You must switch ZONE 3 ON in Using the MULTI ZONE controls on page 66 to hear audio from the DIGITAL OUT1 e In order to record some digital sources you must make analog connections as explained in Connecting analog audio sources on page 26 3 Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Cor
157. ection is for playback only e If your video component doesn t have a digital audio output you can skip this step 2 If your recorder only has a coaxial digital output you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this amplifier using a coaxial digital audio cable When you set up the amplifier you ll need to tell the amplifier which input you connected the recorder to see also The Input Setup menu on page 94 En 03 Connecting your equipment En Using the component video jacks Component video should give superior picture quality when compared to composite or S Video You can also take advantage of progressive scan video if your source and TV are both compatible which delivers a very stable flicker free picture See the manuals that came with your TV and source component to check whether they are compatible with progressive scan video DVD player e aupio PN REENT ies COMPONENT VIDEO W 1 Connect the component video outputs of your source to a set of ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO inputs Connect using a three way component video cable e Since they are assignable it doesn t matter which component video inputs you use for which source After connecting everything you ll need to assign the component video inouts see The nput Setup menu on page 94 2 Connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks to the component video inputs on your TV or monitor Use a three way component video cable
158. ed e Tip e The distance to the subwoofer may be slightly larger than the distance actually measured with a tape measure etc This is because this distance is corrected for electric delay and is not a problem Positional relationship between speakers and monitor Position of front speakers and monitor The front speakers should be as equidistant as possible to the monitor 45 to 60 STN Position of center speaker and monitor Since mostly dialogs are output from the center speaker keeping the center speaker as close as possible to the screen makes the overall sound more natural For TVs using Braun tubes however when installing the center speaker on the floor adjust its angle of elevation to point it towards the listening position Installation on floor Diagram as seen from the side a Y e fthe center speaker is not of the shielded type install it away from the TV e When installing the center speaker on top of the monitor place it facing slightly downwards towards the listening position En Additional information Troubleshooting Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions If you think that there is something wrong with this component check the points below Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below
159. ed If you wish to use the synchronized amp mode switch to HDMI OUT1 then select the synchronized amp mode using the plasma television s remote control e When the power is turned off then back on after switching the HDMI output the input is set to a setting between HDMI1 and HDMIG6 Checking the settings of the sound currently playing etc The audio input output information the video input output information the MULTI ZONE status and this amplitier s setting information can be checked by pressing the status check button on the remote control unit The different sets of information are divided between four screens and displayed on the amplifier s LCD The information shown below can be checked for the different inputs SOURCE TV AMP STATUS 1 Set the operation selector switch to AMP then press STATUS to check the system settings These appear on the front LCD display The screen switches between the five screens below each time the button is pressed e Audio input information DVD LD 55 0dB STATUS AUDIO INPUT lt AUDIO INPUT gt DOLBY DIGITAL w a p At kHz Input signal Input channel on DNS Input seletion a setting and input singal e Audio output information DVD LD 55 0dB STATUS AUDIO OUTPUT lt AUDIO OUTPUT gt Normal Output channel GEIS RS Output format e Video input output information DVD LD 55 0dB STATUS VIDEO lt VIDEO INFORMATION gt i ut si nal INPUT 720
160. edly to cycle the virtual surround back channel options Each press cycles through the options as follows e VirtualSB ON Virtual Surround Back is always used for example on 5 1 encoded material e VirtualSB AUTO Virtual Surround Back is automatically applied to 6 1 encoded sources for example Dolby Digital EX or DIS ES e VirtualSB OFF Virtual Surround Back mode is switched off SBch Standard THX Type of source Vineet se Multi round yP Virtual SB Multichannel surround Dolby Digital EX DTS ES 5 1 ch sources ON with 6 1 ch flagged AUTO r r Dolby Digital DTS and DVD Audio 5 1 ch ON sources AUTO r Dolby Digital DTS PCM and DVD Audio ON o stereo sources AUTO Analog 2 channel stereo sources ON e AUTO DTS HD Master Audio DTS HD Dolby ON o Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD WMA9 Pro F encoded and PCM 6 1 ch 7 1 ch sources AUTO Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD WMA9 ON o Pro 44 1 kHz 48 kHz encoded and PCM F 5 1 ch sources AUTO eo e DTS HD Master Audio DTS HD ON eo o DTS EXPRESS WMA9 Pro 88 2 kHz 96 F kHz encoded 5 1 ch sources AUTO eo e Note 1 By using a combination of surround back channel processing selection with speaker system selection it is possible to switch between a speaker configuration for high sound quality multi channel music sources DVD Audio discs SACDs etc and the speaker configuration recommended by THX for viewing movies F
161. edures and other updated information PlaysForSure PlaysForSure is a marketing certification given by Microsoft The PlaysForSure logo makes it easy to find digital media stores and devices that work together Digital media purchased from online stores carrying the PlaysForSure logo is available for use on this unit This unit complies with PlaysForSure Requirements Specification for Network Devices Version 1 21 The PlaysForSure logo Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries DLNA CERTIFIED Audio Video Image Player The Digital Living Network Alliance DLNA is a cross industry organization of consumer electronics computing industry and mobile device companies Digital Living provides consumers with easy sharing of digital media through a wired or wireless network in the home The DLNA certification logo makes it easy to find products that comply with the DLNA Interoperability Guidelines This unit complies with the DLNA Home Networked Device Interoperability Guidelines v1 0 When aPC running DLNA server software or other DLNA compatible device is connected to this amplifier some setting changes of software or other devices may be required Please refer to the operating instructions for the software or device for more information DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and or service marks of Digital Living Network Allianc
162. eia e AE E a 104 About HX oo ees 127 Default system settings ee a 105 About Neural THX Surround risieisisraiwsa ran 128 About open source related licenses 004 129 Listening modes with different input signal formats 141 12 Controlling the rest of your system Stream direct with different input signal formats 145 Setting the remote to control other components 106 Selecting preset codes directly s a ie eee P Programming signals from other remote controls 106 aa n aio eR a 146 Erasing one of the remote control button settings 107 Cleaning the shiny surfaces of the panel and Resetting thie remote Contro prese aay alowed 107 the liquid crystal display WindoW s s0ce 146 COMMING PICSEUCOCES 2 ti deed EATE 108 Grae 147 ae PECHGA ON di8 beat eu carded ack ae epalte alates Renaming INDULSOUPCE NAMES 5 4 2 nevada ia tee 108 Cleaning the Unit ccccccccccceveceveeees 148 Pire CIUC WhO iawn wantin A ae eared oe 108 Our philosophy sscccccececccveeeecveve 148 Multi Operation and System Off 0 cee ee 108 PEE O anes 148 Programming a multi operation or a SHILITA OW SEUEN Er 3 4 4 4 lacks les ane 2 ttn id lads 109 SIMON AMUN ODETERORI Gia at 6 2 bak aig ied Geers acces 109 USATO EmO cat Oem eS son cls ae os fol ah tied 110 CONTOS MOI S earar ahd saccrsis to Sac Rie aed Gah aioe es 110 Controls Torother component S eraa aE 110 Operating other Pioneer com
163. els can be set e You can t listen to your speaker B system during playback from the multichannel inputs e With MULTI CH IN inputs it is possible to play pictures simultaneously For details see Multi Channel Input Setup on page 96 Other connections Cm 1 Make sure you have set the playback source to the proper output setting For example you might need to set your DVD player to output multichannel analog audio 2 Use the INPUT SELECT button to select MULTI CH IN You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front panel 3 Set the operation selector switch to AMP 4 Press the SIGNAL SEL button repeatedly to select the number of channels of the input signal you want to play The mode switches as shown below each time the button is pressed 2ch ch E 8ch 7ch E e Depending on the DVD player you re using the analog output level of the subwoofer channel may be too low In this case the output level of the subwoofer can be increased by 10 dB in the Multi Ch In Setup in Other Setup For details see Multi Channel Input Setup on page 96 Switching the speaker system When the A B speaker system is switched the speakers being played switches Select the speaker system to be used as necessary e Use the SPEAKERS button on the front panel to select a speaker system setting The modes that can be selected differ according to the speaker output setting see page 43 The mode switches as shown below each tim
164. en headphones are connected e You can also press to select the MCACC preset 3 This amplifier can only play back Dolby Digital PCM 32 kHz to 192 kHz DTS including DTS 96 kHz 24 bit and WMAQ Pro digital signal formats The compatible signals via the HDMI and i LINK terminals are Dolby Digital DTS WMA 9 Pro PCM 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 88 2 kHz and 96 kHz sampling frequencies Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital Plus DTS EXPRESS DTS HD Master Audio SACD and DVD Audio including 192 kHz With other digital signal formats set to ANALOG the MULTI CH IN TUNER and PHONO e You may get digital noise when a LD or CD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal To prevent noise make the proper digital connections page 25 and set the signal input to DIGITAL e Some DVD players don t output DTS signals For more details refer to the instruction manual supplied with your DVD player e Even when i LINK is selected and the i LINK indicator lights you won t hear any sound if the ouput settings of your i LINK device are off e The input signal for unassigned i LINK equipped components is fixed to See Checking the i LINK inputs on page 59 4 Make sure you connect your DVD LD or LD players using the RF IN jack If your player has a OO RF output this will ensure you can use all LDs Refer to Connecting your TV and DVD player on page 20 5 When the HDMI option in Setting the Audio options on page 99 is set to THROUGH the sound will be heard th
165. ending on the speaker placement of your room you may actually experience a decrease in the amount of bass due low frequency cancellations In this case try changing the position or direction of speakers If you can t get good results listen to the bass response with it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears judge which sounds best If you re having problems the easiest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting SMALL for the front speakers 2 e This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE or the subwoofer and bass sounds playing back from those selected as SMALL It also decides where the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel e If you re using a THX speaker setup confirm that the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz 3 e If you are using a Sound Pressure Level SPL meter take the readings from your main listening position and adjust the level of each speaker to 75 dB SPL C weighting slow reading e The subwoofer test tone is output at low volumes You may need to adjust the level after testing with an actual soundtrack Speaker Distance For good sound depth and separation from your system you need to specify the distance of your speakers from the listening position The amplifier can then add the proper delay needed for effective Surround sound A Important e W
166. eparately in the MCACC memory SYMMETRY default implements symmetric correction for each pair of left and right speakers to flatten the frequency amplitude characteristics ALL CH ADJUST is a flat setting where all the speakers are set individually so no special weighting is given to any one channel FRONT ALIGN sets all soeakers in accordance with the front speaker settings no equalization is applied to the front left and right channels THX Speaker 0n y available when the Custom Menu above is ALL or Speaker Setting Select YES if you are using THX speakers set all soeakers to SMALL otherwise leave it set to NO e Stand Wave Multi Point on y available when the Custom Menu above is EQ Pro amp S Wave In addition to measurements at the listening position you can use two more reference points for which test tones will be analyzed for standing waves This is useful if you want to get a balanced flat calibration for several seating positions in your listening area Place the microphone at the reference point indicated on screen and note the last microphone placement will be at your main listening position CUSTOM and set the following parameters using 2nd reference 3rd reference DVD LD DVD LD DVD LD 55 0dB 1 Auto MCACC 1 Auto MCACC 1 Auto MCACC Output Setup Custom Menu SYMMETRY Normal lt ALL lt TR ae gt ALL CH ADJ M2 ME MORY 2 FRONT ALIGN M3 ME MORY 3 THX Spe
167. equipped component is selected e Check the i LINK connections use an i LINK cable of less than 3 5 m e Check that the source components conforms to the i LINK Audio format e Make sure that all components connected between the amplifier and the source are switched on PQLS OFF or PQLS ON is e During playback through an i LINK connection if you change the settings for other i LINK components displayed temporarily on your the sound will be discontinued momentarily This is not a malfunction amplifier and the sound output is discontinued The program format indicators e The program format indicators remain lit until another format source is input This is not a malfunction don t disappear when SACD playback stops You can t get i LINK to display e Make sure your i LINK Source components are switched on when using the SIGNAL SEL e Check that i LINK is assigned correctly see The Input Setup menu on page 94 button After upgrading a component it You may need to reset the i LINK database memory in the amplifier use the front panel is not recognized and cannot be 1 Inthe standby mode press STANDBY ON while pressing SETUP selected using the i LINK 2 Use B to select i LINK DB NO then press ENTER connection 3 Use to select Clear then press ENTER 4 When Clear OK appears press ENTER again Resetting is completed once the normal screen appears If DB ERROR is displayed perform the procedure again EE Ad
168. ere are no obstacles between the amplifier and the remote control e Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the remote sensor e Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jack see Operating other Pioneer components with this unit s sensor on page 111 Other components can t be e If the battery ran down the preset codes may have been cleared Re enter the preset codes operated with the system remote e The preset code may be incorrect Redo the procedure for entering preset codes The SR cable is connected but Reinsert the SR cable making sure it s connected to the right jack see Using this amplifier with a the connected components can t Pioneer plasma television on page 68 be operated with the remote e Make sure that there is an analog or HDMI connection between the units This is necessary for the SR feature to work e Check that the other component is made by Pioneer The SR feature only works with Pioneer equipment i LINK interface Symptom Remedy No sound is output e Check that the source player is compatible with i LINK audio e Check the output settings of the source player e Make sure that i LINK or AUTO is selected using the SIGNAL SEL button see Choosing the input signal on page 37 The i LINK indicator does not e Make sure that i LINK or AUTO is selected using the SIGNAL SEL button see Choosing the input signal light up even when an i LINK on page 37
169. eted step 1 in Data Management on page 50 Note that transmission data is erased when the amplifier is turned off 1 Select Output PC and press ENTER When the amplifier is ready for transmission Start the MCACC application on your PC shows on the OSD DVD LD 55 0dB DVD LD 5 Data Management 5e Output PC a MCACC Data Check b Memory Rename c MCACC Memory Copy Start the MCACC d MCACC epee test application on your PC Return Cancel 2 Start the MCACC application on your computer Follow the instructions provided with the application It will take about ten seconds for the transmission to complete then you will be able to analyze the output on your computer Since the data will be cleared from the amplifier when you restart reverb measurement or turn off the amplifier you might want to save the information on your PC after measurement 3 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Data Management menu Continue with other settings in the Data Management menu if necessary Press RETURN again to exit the Data Management menu Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs CH Chapter 8 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs Enjoying the Home Media Gallery With Home Media Gallery you can enjoy digital content such as movies music and photo files Playable content is files stored on one or more media servers connected by a home network LAN or those stored on a USB flash drive After conne
170. etting The X Curve is expressed as a downwards slope in decibels per octave starting at 2 kHz Ihe sound becomes less bright as the slope increases to a maximum of 3 0dB oct Use the following guidelines to set the X Curve according to your room size Room size m2 e f you select OFF the frequency curve will be flat and the X Curve has no effect 3 When you re finished press RETURN THX Audio Setting When the THX Loudness Plus function is used sound can be played with the full Surround effect even when the volume is low With some speaker setups depending on the position of the subwoofer and the walls in your listening area you may experience overly resonant frequencies in the bass If you have this problem use the THX Ultra2 subwoofer setup to switch on boundary gain compensation see About THX on page 127 for more on this For the most effective results when using the THX Ultra2 Cinema THX Ultra2 Music Mode and THX Ultra2 Games Mode listening modes see Using the Home THX modes on page 35 with the Advanced Speaker Array ASA system see About THX on page 127 it is required that you make the setting See Placing the speakers on page 28 for more on THX speaker placement 1 Since the principal is the same X Curve isn t applied when you re using any of the Home THX modes see Using the Home THX modes on page 35 2 If you don t have surround back speakers or just have one or you select All Ch Bi Amp in Out
171. f acquired by Auto IP and Firewall setup Also check if the IP Address is properly acquired with DHCP on the Network Setup screen that follows the Setup menu e Using two or more application servers on a single PC may cause unstable operation For proper operation it is strongly recommended that one application server is used on a single PC e Check the PC if its media server is running Restart if necessary Check if one or more servers are On this may cause malfunction e Check if the PC is operating properly Reboot the PC after confirming its specifications and setup e Check the media server setup If a client is registered manually the setup procedure may have to be run again An option Not Allowed may have been selected for connections e Check if UPnP Universal Plug and Play is enabled on your router If it is not enable it Refer to your router s instruction manual for procedures e Wait for a short period then select Update to Latest Information from the Tool Menu See page 78 No previously connected server s found items in Select Servers are dimmed An available server is selected but cannot be navigated e Refer to the possible solutions provided for No servers are found e Check if the server is correctly set up for file sharing if the target folder has been deleted or if one or more folders have been corrupted on the server e Check if there are too m
172. f the speakers you ve connected see Manual speaker setup on page 52 Input Setup Specifies what you ve connected to the digital HDMI component video and S Video inputs see The nout Setup menu on page 94 e OSD Language he OSD s display language can be changed see Changing the OSD display language OSD Language on page 95 Other Setup Makes customized settings to reflect how you are using the amplifier see 7he Other Setup menu on page 96 Automatic MCACC Expert If your setup requires more detailed settings than those provided in Automatically setting up for surround sound MCACC amp Full Band Phase Contro on page 11 you can Customize your setup options below You can calibrate your system differently for up to six different MCACC presets which are useful if you have different listening positions depending on the type of source for example watching movies from a sofa or playing a video game close to the ht 2 e Note that when editing items in the Manual MCACC menu you will need to first specify the MCACC preset you want to adjust by pressing MCACC before pressing SETUP e When the iPod or HOME MEDIA GALLERY input source is selected in either the main or sub zone or when using headphones you can t use the System Setup menu When you set ZONE 2 ZONE 3 or ZONE 2 amp 3 to ON page 66 you can t use the System Setup menu 3 These are stored in memory and referred to as MEMORY1 to MEMORY6
173. fault Settings Software Update and Home Media Gallery Version A Network Setup 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed 2 Select Setup then ENTER 3 Select Network Setup Auto Connection Setup Default Settings Software Update and Home Media Gallery Version then ENTER Network Setup When you select Network Setup from the Setup menu a Submenu is displayed to select Auto or Manual for network connections To automatically set The following setup is effective for Auto only To perform the procedure DHCP on your server or router must be valid 1 Select Automatically acquire IP then press ENTER t then ENTER 2 Select Yes then ENTER 3 Select OK then ENTER A restart dialog screen appears 4 Press ENTER again on the dialog screen The setup finishes The system restarts then the Home Media Gallery screen returns To manually set Before setting up check your media server for IP Address and Subnet mask 1 Select Automatically acquire IP then press ENTER t then ENTER 2 Select No then ENTER 3 Select the setup item s box t then ENTER The screen turns to entry mode for IP Address and Subnet mask No need to enter Default Gateway and DNS Server 4 Enter the figures using buttons 0 to 9 Subnet mask such as 255 255 255 0 Enter the same figures as
174. fer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer in accord with Subsection b above The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable However as a special exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 4 You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties
175. format Windows Media Player A free digital media player application provided by Microsoft that is used for playing audio video and images on PCs Windows Media Player 11 The functionality of Windows Media Connect has been integrated into this version of Windows Media Player After installing Windows Media Player 11 Windows Media Connect will not function See Microsoft s website for details Details of compatible formats See Supported file formats on page 71 for a list of the file extensions with which this amplifier is compatible Compatible movie file formats e MPEG 1 2 PS Up to 1280 x 720 720p MPEG 2 TS TTS Up to 1280 x 720 720p e WMV not copyright protected Up to 1280 x 720 720p WMV copyright protected Up to 720 x 480 480p e MPEG 4 Up to 1280 x 720 720p Compatible audio file formats e MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 MP3 Sampling frequency Up to 48 kHz Bit rate Up to 320 kbps No channels Up to 2 e MPEG 4 AAC AAC LC Sampling frequency Up to 48 kHz Bit rate Up to 320 kbps No channels Up to 2 e Linear PCM LPCM Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 64 kHz Quantization bits 16 No channels Up to 2 1 Files stored on USB memory devices and protected by digital copyright management DRM WMDRM cannot be played e Files protected by digital copyright management DRM WMDRIM can only be played when connected to a DRM WMDRM compatible media server 08 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs e W
176. from Microsoft Corporation You can check for the PlaysForSure logo at various online stores Where you see the PlaysForSure logo you can be sure that the digital media you are purchasing music video pictures will play on this unit Subnet mask Used when IP addresses are broken into several parts It is expressed as 255 255 255 0 In most cases the Subnet mask is automatically assigned by the DHCP server UPnP Universal Plug and Play Architecture for pervasive peer to peer network connectivity of devices of all form factors It is designed to bring easy to use flexible standardsbased connectivity to ad hoc or unmanaged networks whether in the home in a small business public spaces or attached to the Internet USB Universal Serial Bus USB provides a serial bus standard for connecting devices usually to computers such as PCs This amplifier supports the Mass Storage Class Windows Media Connect Microsoft Windows Media Connect is a new technology to distribute music photos and video stored on a PC with Windows XP installed to a stereo system of TV Using this technology you can playback Tiles stored on the PC trom various devices wherever you like in your home Note Windows Media DRM Windows Media DRM is copyright protection technology developed by Microsoft Corporation It enables content providers to distribute over the Internet music video and other digital media content in a protected encrypted file
177. g feature filters the information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers This ensures seamless panning between the front and Surround speakers e Adaptive Decorrelation In a movie theatre a large number of surround speakers help create an enveloping Surround sound experience but in a home theatre there are usually only two speakers This can make the surround speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and envelopment The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you move away from the middle seating position Adaptive Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel s time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel This expands the listening position and creates with only two speakers the same spacious Surround experience as in a movie theatre e THX Ultra2 Before any home theatre component can be THX Ultra2 certified it must incorporate all the features above and also pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests Only then can a product feature the THX Ultra2 logo which is your guarantee that the Home Theatre products you purchase will give you Superb performance for many years to come THX Ultra2 requirements cover every aspect of the product including pre amplifier and power amplifier performance and operation and hundreds of other parameters in both the digita
178. he operation selector switch to SOURCE then press the other device operation button of the device you want to operate Button s Function Components SOURCEO Press to switch the component CD MD CD R between standby and on DVD LD BD DVR player VCR Cassette deck lt lt Press to return to the start of the CD MD CD R Current track or chapter DVD LD BD Repeated presses skips to the start player of previous tracks or chapters P Press to advance to the start of the CD MD CD R next track or chapter DVD LD BD Repeated presses skips to the start player of following tracks or chapters CD MD CD R DVD LD BD DVR player VCR Cassette deck CD MD CD R DVD LD BD DVR player VCR Cassette deck CD MD CD R DVD LD BD DVR player VCR Cassette deck CD MD CD R DVD LD BD DVR player VCR Cassette deck lI Pause playback or recording gt Start playback pe be Hold down for fast forward playback EE Hold down for fast reverse playback 1 In order to avoid accidently switching off a DVD recorder that is currently recording no DVD recorder power off codes are sent Controlling the rest of your system Cz Button s Function Components a Stops playback CD MD CD R Operating other Pioneer components DVD LD BD DVR 4I v with this unit s sensor Cassette deck Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL jacks Number Directly access tracks on a CD MD CD R which can be used to link components together so th
179. he Photo Player screen appears when you select a photo file from My Playlist just like selecting a file in the server Screen Components Photo icon File name Folder name etc Date Number of items Play status Key guide Progress bar O ON AU PWN Repeat mode icon O Random mode icon Displays only when playing the slideshow Photo Player key guide Button s Function ENTER Starts displaying a photo or playing a slideshow Pauses while playback or plays back while in PAUSE RETURN Stops the Player and returns to the previous screen List Thumbnail Thumbnail List ft Displays the previous image content 4 Display the next image content gt Plays a slideshow lI Pauses the slideshow a Stops the Player and returns to the previous screen List Thumbnail Thumbnail List gt gt Rotates the image 90 clockwise Each press toggles the rotation angle by 90 among 90 180 270 and 0 lt lt Rotates the image 90 counter clockwise Each press toggles the rotation angle by 90 among 270 180 90 and 0 AUTO DIRECT Rotates the image 90 clockwise Each press Blue toggles the rotation angle by 90 among 90 180 270 and 0 STEREO Available only when playing the slideshow Every F S SURR Red press toggles the repeat mode between No Repeat and Repeat All STANDARD Green Available only when playing the slideshow Every press toggles the random m
180. he channel level settings see Channel Level on page 53 e Check the speaker connections see Connecting the speakers on page 28 No sound from surround back e Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL see Speaker Setting on page 52 speakers e Make sure surround back processing is set to SBch ON see Using surround back channel processing on page 37 e f the source is Dolby Surround EX or DTS ES with no flag to indicate 6 1 compatibility then with surround back processing set to SBch Auto there will be no sound from the surround back speakers In this case set to SBch ON see Using surround back channel processing on page 37 e Ifthe source does not have 6 1 playback channels make sure that surround back processing is set to SBch ON and a surround mode is selected see Listening in surround sound on page 34 e Check the speaker connections see Connecting the speakers on page 28 If only one surround back speaker is connected make sure it s connected to the left channel speaker terminal Additional information Symptom Remedy No sound from subwoofer e Check that the subwoofer is connected properly switched on and the volume turned up e If your Subwoofer has a sleep function make sure it is switched off e Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS see Speaker Setting on page 52 e The crossover frequency may be set too low try setting it higher to match t
181. he characteristics of your other speakers see Speaker Setting on page 52 e If there is very little low frequency information in the source material change your speaker settings to Front SMALL Subwoofer YES or Front LARGE Subwoofer PLUS see Speaker Setting on page 52 e Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF or a very quiet setting see Setting the Audio options on page 99 e Check the speaker level settings see Channel Level on page 53 e Check that the subwoofer is only connected to the PREOUT SUBWOOFER terminal When only connecting one subwoofer connect it to the PREOUT SUBWOOFER terminal No sound from one speaker e Check the speaker connection see Connecting the speakers on page 28 e Check the speaker level settings see Channel Level on page 53 e Check that the speaker hasn t been set to NO see Speaker Setting on page 52 e The channel may not be recorded in the source By using one of the advanced effect listening mode you may be able to create the missing channel see Listening in surround sound on page 34 Sound is produced from analog Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL see Choosing the input signal on page 37 components but not from digital Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is connected to ones DVD LD CD ROM etc see The Input Setup menu on page 94 e Check the digital output settings on the sou
182. hear the lip movement of the singer e Speech heard with no loss of clarity Ms e Surround sound with excellent integration w SOURCE AMP PHASE Sound in the middle and low frequency ranges is i delayed against the high frequency sound due to group Set the operation selector switch to AMP then delay press PHASE PHASE CONTROL to select FULLBAND PHASE Both the Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control functions are switched on The PHASE CONTROL indicator lights on the front LCD display PA Note 1 To calibrate and analyze the frequency phase characteristics of the speakers follow the procedures in Auto MCACC Setup see Automatically setting up for surround sound MCACC amp Full Band Phase Control on page 11 or FULL BAND PHASE CTRL in the System Setup see Fu Band Phase Control on page 49 Select ALL when you perform the Auto MCACC Setup with CUSTOM Upon calibration of the frequency phase characteristics of the speakers the FULL BAND PHASE CTRL feature is automatically switched on Note that FULLBAND PHASE cannot be selected unless the frequency phase characteristics of the speakers are calibrated 2 The original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the targeted characteristics after correction can be displayed graphically in the OSD see Full Band Phase Contro on page 49 Also when your PC is connected to this amplifier the original characteristics of group delay of
183. hen Speaker Distance is selected while MCACC is set to OFF the selection screen for the MCACC memory appears Select a memory to adjust manually DVD LD 55 0dB 6c Speaker Distance Select MCACC memory MCACC OFF A A M1 ME MORY 1 8 ENTER Next Cancel 1 Select Speaker Distance from the Manual SP Setup menu DVD LD 55 0dB DVD LD 6 Manual SP Setup 6c Speaker Distance MCACC M1 MEMORY 1 E ofa 55 0dB a Speaker Setting b Channel Level fe E E a E 4 d X Curve 5 e THX Audio Setting 1 0 A 6 2 B 4 8 Return Finish 2 Adjust the distance of each speaker using the buttons You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 0 01 m increments 3 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu Tip e For best surround sound make sure the surround back speakers are the same distance from the listening position Note 06 The System Setup menu X Curve Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright when played back in large rooms The X Curve setting acts as a kind of re equalization for home theater listening and restores proper tonal balance of movie soundtracks 1 Select X Curve from the Manual SP Setup menu DVD LD 6 Manual SP Setup a Speaker Setting b Channel Level c Speaker Distance e THX Audio Setting Return Finish 2 Choose the X Curve setting you want Use to adjust the s
184. his is most obvious when comparing the frequencies at 0 ms This initial slope is not a problem i e excessive reverb with your listening room 06 The System Setup menu En Setting Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional according to your room characteristics Using the manual setup you can set the time period at which the frequency response is analyzed pinpointing the time that is best for system calibration with your particular room characteristics The graph below shows the difference between conventional acoustic calibration and professional calibration the gray circle indicates the point where the microphone captures sound during frequency analysis Test tone Acoustic Cal EQ Pro Conventional MCACC calibration range EQ calibration range Time 0 80 160 in msec As soon as audio is output from your speaker system it is influenced by room characteristics such as walls furniture and the dimensions of the room The sooner the frequency analysis the less it is influenced by the room We recommend an earlier time setting of 30 50ms to compensate for two major factors that will influence the sound of most rooms e Reverberance of high vs low frequencies Depending on your room you may find that lower frequencies seem overly reverberant compared to higher frequencies i e your room sounds boomy This may result in a skewed frequency analysis if the measurement is done too late
185. ic License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or your school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the library if necessary Here is a sample alter the names Yoyodyne Inc hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library Frob a library for tweaking knobs written by James Random Hacker signature of Ty Coon 1 April 1990 Ty Coon President of Vice That s all there is to it Additional information CH Listening modes with different input signal formats The following charts outline the listening modes available with different input signal formats depending on the surround back channel processing and decoding method you have selected Stereo 2 channel signal formats SBch Processing Input signal format SBch Dolby Digital Plus Processing Dolby TrueHD ON AUTO WMA9 Pro Automatically 44 1 kHz 48 kHz Standard OO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE OO Pro Logic Ilx MUSIC OO Pro Logic IIx GAME OO PRO LOGIC THX Auto Surround DO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE THX D00 PRO LOGIC THX THX Ultra2 GAMES Stereo playback OO Pro Logic Ilx MUSIC THX MUSIC OO Pro Logic IIx GAME THX GAME
186. ics of your room sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm end up with different size settings You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 52 e The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position This setting should be accurate taking delay and room characteristics into account and generally does not need to be changed e f Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing environment we recommend adjusting the settings manually 3 Make sure that the TV s video input is set to this amplifier for example if you connected this amplifier to the VIDEO 1 jacks on your TV make sure that the VIDEO 1 input is now selected 4 f you need to manually switch the input signal type press SIGNAL SEL page 37 5 e You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver It should be set to output Dolby Digital DTS and 88 2 kHz 96 kHz PCM 2 channel audio and if there is an MPEG audio option set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM e Depending on your DVD player or source discs you may only get digital 2 channel stereo and analog sound In this case the amplifier must be set to a multichannel listening mode see Listening in surround sound on page 34 if you need to do this if you want multichannel surround sound 02 Simple Home Theater Guide
187. ideo as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the connected component is compatible with including DVD Video DVD Audio SACD Dolby Digital Plus Dolby aaa a Ra e a TrueHD DTS HD Master Audio see below for limitations Video CD Super VCD CD and MP3 See About the video converter above for more on HDMI compatibility When connecting to an HDMI DVI compatible monitor or S VIDEO IN S VIDEO a plasma television using the HDMI OUT 2 terminal MONITOR OUT switch the HDMI output setting to HDMI OUT2 See Switching the HDMI output on page 103 VIDEO IN VIDEO MONITOR OUT e Video signals can be output KA Note 1 Ifthe video signal does not appear on your TV or plasma television try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display Note that some components such as video game units have resolutions that may not be converted In this case try switching Digital Video Conversion in Setting the Video options on page 101 OFF e The ZONE 2 video input can also be converted For details see ZONE Video Setup on page 96 2 e An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection HDCP If you choose to connect to a DVI connector you will need a separate adaptor DVI HDMI to do so A DVI connection however does not support audio signals Consult your local audio dealer for more information e If you connect a component that is not compati
188. ied out on this unit cords to the wall socket Refer to the operating manual for your plasma television e After connecting this amplifier to an AC outlet a 15 for more information about which operations can be second initialization process begins You cannot carried out by connecting via HDMI cable carry out any operations during initialization The e You cannot use this function with components that HDMI indicator on the display unit blinks during do not support HDMI Control initialization and you can turn this amplifier on once e We cannot guarantee this unit will work with HDMI it has stopped blinking Control compatible components other than those e To get the most out of this function we recommend made by Pioneer that you connect your HDMI component not to a plasma television but rather directly to the HDMI terminal on this amplitier To use the HDMI control function connect this amplifier and plasma television using the HDMI OUT 1 terminal Connecting the HDMI control compatible component using the HDMI OUT 2 terminal may Making the HDMI Control connections You can use synchronized operation for a connected plasma television and up to six other components Be sure to connect the plasma television s audio cable to result in malfunction If this happens turn off the the audio input of this unit HDMI control compatible component s HDMI control setting e HDMI Control is compatible with up to six units 3 DVD or Blu ray disc p
189. igh sound quality multi channel music sources with the speaker layout recommended by the ITU R 6 1 or 5 2 channels About ITU R BS 775 1 This configuration is recommended by the ITU R International Telecommunication Union Radiocommunication Sector It is the basic configuration used in DVD Audio and SACD mixing studios though in some cases the sound is recorded with the assumption that the surround speakers are at the 135 position Setting the speaker system for movie sources Surround Surround SBL SBR Surround Back SBL SBR Speaker configuration recommended by THX Set the speakers with the surround back speakers adjacent to each other and equidistant trom the listening position 1 Switch the speaker system Select A ON B is turned off and sound is only produced from the surround A channel dipole speaker 2 Switch the surround back channel Select SBch ON The above settings allow you to enjoy movies with the speaker layout recommended by THX 7 1 or 7 2 channels Bi amping your speakers Bi amping is when you connect the high frequency driver and low frequency driver of your speakers to different amplifiers for better crossover performance Your speakers must be bi ampable to do this having separate terminals for high and low and the sound improvement will depend on the kind of speakers you re using e Connect
190. in this case this adjustment allows you to optimize the correction Note that if the Auto MCACC Setup is performed after completing the fine adjustment here the correction precision will drop to about 1 cm e Like with the Auto MCACC Setup perform this adjustment in as quiet an environment as possible 0 0 will be displayed if abrupt noise is input during the adjustment e The distance for all the channels can only be made uniform even if the R front right channel is adjusted in the proper order e Be very careful not to tip the speakers over when moving them e The result of the adjustment performed here can be checked by listening to the test pulses output at the Fine adjusting the positions of the speakers Precision Distance on page 45 the test pulses will be more centrally positioned between the speakers than before the adjustment was performed Be careful not to change the distance values at this time 2 You can switch on or off the Standing Wave feature in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu See Setting the Audio options on page 99 for more on this 3 e Since they will be overwritten you may want to save the standing wave settings made with the Auto MCACC Setup to another MCACC preset e Standing Wave control filter settings cannot be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI connection e When Standing Wave is selected for a MCACC preset memory where STAND WAVE is set to OFF in the AUDIO PARAMETER STAND WAVE ON is
191. in to re establish the connection between them CANNOT LINK 2 The amplifier can t identify the selected i LINK equipped component For example the amplifier may not be able to identify an i LINK equipped personal computer LINK CHECK The amplifier is checking the i LINK network It does this when components are added to or removed from the network The sound may be interrupted if this happens during playback LOOP CONNECT The i LINK network cannot function because the connected components form a loop See The Input Setup menu on page 94 for more on this NO NAME When an i LINK equipped component has no name this message is displayed instead of the proper component name NO SIGNAL A component is outputting an i LINK signal that the amplifier cannot reproduce This amplifier can only reproduce signals from i LINK Audio equipped components See About i LINK on page 59 for more on this PQLS OFF This is displayed on a playback component when PQLS turns off during playback The sound may be interrupted momentarily when this happens PQLS ON This is displayed on a playback component when PQLS turns on during playback The sound may be interrupted momentarily when this happens UNKNOWN When an i LINK equipped component name cannot be recognized this message is displayed instead of the proper component name Meaning of messages displayed when the HDMI control function is set to ON Message error number Problem Remedy HDMI C ERR 110 to 1
192. ing to a source press STANDARD If necessary press repeatedly to select a listening mode e Ifthe source is Dolby Digital DIS or Dolby Surround encoded the proper decoding format will automatically be selected and shows in the display With two channel sources you can select from OO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE Up to 7 1 channel sound especially suited to movie sources OO Pro Logic IIx MUSIC Up to 7 1 channel sound especially suited to music sources OO Pro Logic IIx GAME Up to 7 1 channel sound especially suited to video games e DO PRO LOGIC 4 1 channel surround sound sound from the surround speakers is mono e Neo 6 CINEMA 7 1 channel sound especially suited to movie sources e Neo 6 MUSIC 7 1 channel sound especially suited to music sources Neural THX Up to 7 1 channel sound especially suited to music sources With multichannel sources if you have connected surround back speaker s and have selected SBch ON you can select according to format OO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE See above only available when you re using two surround back speakers OO Pro Logic IIx MUSIC See above e Dolby Digital EX Creates surround back channel sound for 5 1 channel sources and provides pure decoding for 6 1 channel sources like Dolby Digital Surround EX 1 Stereo surround matrix formats are decoded accordingly using Neo 6 CINEMA or D0 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE see Listening in surround sound above
193. ings in the Manual MCACC setup menu to make detailed adjustments when you re more familiar with the system Before making these settings you should have already completed Automatically setting up for surround sound MCACC amp Full Band Phase Control on page 11 You only need to make these settings once unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or add new speakers Caution e The test tones used in the System Setup are output at high volume A Important e You will need to first specify the MCACC preset you want to adjust by pressing MCACC before pressing SETUP step 2 in Making amplifier settings from the System Setup menu on page 40 When Manual MCACC is selected while MCACC is set to OFF the selection screen for the MCACC memory appears Select a memory to adjust manually DVD LD 3 Manual MCACC Select MCACC memory MCACC OFF Vv bIM1 MEMORY 1 ag ENTER Next Cancel For some of the settings below you ll have to connect the setup microphone to the front panel and place it about ear level at your normal listening position Press SETUP to display the System Setup menu before you connect the microphone to this amplifier If the microphone is connected while the System Setup menu is not being displayed the display will change to the Auto MCACC setup menu See Problems when using the Auto MCACTC Setup on page 13 for notes regarding high background noise levels and other possible interferen
194. io to provide a wide stable rear soundstage e THX Games For the replay of stereo and multi channel game audio the THX Games Mode should be selected In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5 1 and 2 0 encoded game sources such as analog PCM DTS and Dolby Digital This accurately places all game audio surround information providing a full 360 degree playback environment THX Games Mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround field 127 En EE Additional information En e THX Loudness Plus Description THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control technology featured in THX Ultra2 Plus and THX Select2 Plus Certified amplifiers With THX Loudness Plus home theater audiences can now experience the rich details in a surround mix at any volume level A consequence of turning the volume below Reference Level is that certain sound elements can be lost or perceived differently by the listener THX Loudness Plus compensates for the tonal and spatial shifts that occur when the volume is reduced by intelligently adjusting ambient surround channel levels and frequency response This enables users to experience the true impact of soundtracks regardless of the volume setting THX Loudness Plus is automatically applied when listening in any THX listening mode The new THX Cinema THX Music and THX Games modes are tailored to apply the proper THX Loudness Plu
195. ished you can select Group Delay View to see the results on screen 4 If you selected Group Delay View you can check the graph showing the group delay characteristics Press RETURN then you re done DVD LD 55 0dB 4b Group Delay View Original amp Target Tergeted ae Channel tera gt characteristics after MS al correction oe ae A Original Org Puja characteristics of the speakers calibrated Note This appears according to the setting you chose in Measurement step 2 above Use to select the channel you want to check Data Management This system allows you to store up to six MCACC presets allowing you to calibrate your system for different listening positions or frequency adjustments for the same listening position This is useful for alternate settings to match the kind of source you re listening to and where you re sitting for example watching movies from a sofa or playing a video game close to the TV From this menu you can check your current settings copy from one preset to another name presets for easier identification and clear any ones you don t need 1 Select Data Management from the System Setup menu See Making amplifier settings from the System Setup menu on page 40 if you re not already at this screen DVD LD 55 0dB DVD LD 55 0dB System Setup MENU 5 Data Management 1 Auto MCACC 2 Output Setup 3 Ma
196. it may scratch this amplitier s Surface e f the wiping cloth is dirty clean it as described below Dilute neutral detergent in about 100 parts water wash the cloth by rubbing it against itself in this solution rinse it carefully to remove any traces of detergent then let it dry e If the wiping cloth has been lost or is extremely dirty order anew one either from your nearest sales outlet or directly from the Pioneer Parts Order Center You can also use a commercially available lens cleaning cloth instead Additional information Specifications Amplifier section Multi channel simultaneous power output 20 Hz to 20 kHz 0 05 8 Q OY 10 C hea erae eee ean ek 140 W Total 1400 W Stereo power output 20 Hz to 20 kHz 0 05 8Q 200 W 200 W 20 Hz 10 20 KHZ 0 05 6 Ok ia i dire ves 270 W 270 W WIZ OOS Ge A O soy ashy oy secs andes dees ae 400 W 400 W e The above specifications are applicable when the power supply is 230 V Audio Section Input Sensitivity Impedance PRONO MN sic aa ead dod Smee nce s 5 0 mV 47 kO INE ordre hans add hehe ene iee need peek 475 mV 47 KQ Frequency Response LINE 5 Hz to 100 000 Hz dB Output Level Impedance PS cee aden wo eck TTS 475 mV 2 2 kQ Signal to Noise Ratio IHF short circuited A network BTN Ecc oe a psec aisae oer vert eee th ecesa des aces etd ws ace a 105 dB Signal to Noise Ratio DIN continuous rated power output 50 mW NE oak ere Anse
197. ite cable receiver doesn t have a digital audio output you can skip this step En Connecting your equipment 03 Connecting a DVD HDD recorder VCR and other video sources This amplifier has two sets of audio video inputs and outputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video devices including DVD HDD recorders and VCRs SC LX90 HDMI IM ASSIGNABLE 166 HDMICTRL QUT2 INE NA NE Na NE NG i 400 400 JJJ TE FO VIDEO AVIN VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO DVR VCR etc 1 Connect the audio video outputs of the video 3 If the device can output digital audio connect an player recorder to the DVR VCR 1 AUDIO and VIDEO optical type digital audio output from the recorder to Inputs the OPTICAL IN 3 DVR VCR 1 input Use a stereo RCA phono jack audio cable for the audio ane connection and a video or S Video cable for the video Use an optical cable for the connection connection e For a second recorder use the OPTICAL IN 4 DVR e For a second recorder use the DVR VCR 2 IN inputs MCR 2 input 2 Ifthe device can record connect the DVR VCR 1 AUDIO and VIDEO outputs to the recorder s audio video inputs Use a stereo RCA phono jack audio cable for the audio connection and a video or S Video cable for the video connection e For a second recorder use the DVR VCR 2 OUT outputs Note 1 In order to record you must connect the analog audio cables the digital conn
198. ivers CD players etc There s also an RF IN jack for connection to an LD player with a D0 RF output See also The nput Setup menu on page 94 to assign the inputs 3 Optical and coaxial digital audio outputs x3 Use for recording to a CD or MiniDisc recorder See Connecting digital audio sources on page 25 These jacks are also used for MULTI ZONE connections See MULTI ZONE listening on page 64 VIDEO REC SEL REC SEL OUT DVR OuT2 IN REC SEL OUT 25 zd wn vpn Ne L4 s462 L3 6aa6a L2 s2469 L1 aoa6a Plt Flt lt A a HIGH LOW SURROUND FRONT 4 HDMI connectors x8 Multiple inputs and two outputs for high quality audio video connection to compatible HDMI devices See Connecting using HDMI on page 18 See Switching the HDMI output on page 103 5 LAN 10 100 terminal See Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs on page 1 6 iPod input terminal Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio or video SOUICe See Connecting an iPod on page 56 7 Multichannel pre amplifier outputs Use to connect separate amplifiers for front center surround Surround back and subwoofer channels See Connecting additional amplifiers on page 63 see also nstalling your speaker system on page 27 for powered subwoofer connection 8 MULTI ZONE audio outputs Use to connect a second or third amplifier in a separate room See MULTI ZONE listening on page 64 Connecting your equi
199. l and analog domain e THX Surround EX THX Surround EX Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint develooment of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd In a movie theater film soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added during the mixing of the program This channel called Surround Back places sounds behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left front center front right surround right surround left and subwoofer channels This additional channel provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more depth spacious ambience and sound localization than ever before Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital Surround EX technology when released into the home consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the packaging A list of movies created using this technology can be found on the Dolby web site at www dolby com Only amplifier and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX logo when in the THX Surround EX mode faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home This product may also engage the THX Surround EX mode during the playback of 5 1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded In such case the information delivered to the Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundt
200. l channels In this case make a digital or analog audio connection e To output signals in DeepColor use an HDMI cable High Speed HDMI Cable to connect this amplifier to a component or TV with the DeepColor feature e Try changing the Resolution setting in Setting the Video options on page 101 e Set the HDMI output setting to the connected HDMI OUT terminal in Switching the HDMI output on page 103 e Check that the HDMI AV setting is set to AMP THROUGH e If the component is a DVI device use a separate connection for the audio e If analog video is being output over HDMI please use a separate connection for the audio e Check the audio output settings of the source component e Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal during scanning for example or the video quality may just be poor with some video game units for example The picture quality may also depend on the settings etc of your display device Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and display device using the same type of connection component S Video or composite then start playback again e Ifthe problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor please consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support e Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP If it is not compatible with HDCP reconnect the source device using a different type of
201. l of an analog signal The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog signal when it s too strong You can use this if ANALOG INPUT OVER is displayed on the LCD or if you can hear distortion in the sound TV SOURCE AMP A ATT e Set the operation selector switch to AMP then press A ATT to switch the input attenuator on or off Using the sleep timer The sleep timer switches the amplifier into standby after a specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without worrying about the amplifier being left on all night Use the remote control to set the sleep timer Tv SOURCE AMP SLEEP e Set the operation selector switch to AMP then press SLEEP repeatedly to set the sleep time 60 min 30 min 90 min e You can check the remaining sleep time at any time by pressing SLEEP once Pressing repeatedly will cycle through the sleep options again Switching the contents displayed on the LCD One of three patterns of information to be displayed on the LCD can be selected By default this is set to OSD e Press LCD VIEW on the front panel to change the pattern of information OSD External External Image Image amp Only OSD Note This can be set separately for different inputs Note however that only inputs with a video terminal DVD LD BD TV SAT DVR VCR1 DVR VCR2 VIDEO GAME1 and VIDEO GAME2 inputs from an iPod on which video is playing and inputs from MULTI CH IN for which
202. layers and 3 DVD or Blu ray disc recorders The maximum number of units may differ depending on the connected plasma television SC LX90 HDMI BME ASSIGNABLE 1m i 400 5400 NE NA INE IND INE Ng HDMI CTRL ouT2 a m ez EA gz Z i y g 2 O O o GAM 4 IN DVRIVCR 1 l IN DVRIVCR 2 HDMI DVI equipped component HDMI DVI compatible monitor or plasma television En Setting the HDMI options You must adjust the settings of this amplifier as well as HDMI Control compatible connected components in order to make use of the HDMI Control function For more information see the operating instructions for each component Setting the HDMI Control mode Choose whether to set this unit s HDMI Control function ON or OFF You will need to set it to ON to use the HDMI Control function e When using a TV not manufactured by Pioneer put this setting to OFF 1 Set the operation selector switch to AMP then press the SETUP button 2 Select Other Setup then press ENTER 3 Select HDMI Control Setup from the Other Setup menu DVD LD 55 0dB DVD LD 55 0dB 9e HDMI Control Setup 9 Other Setup a Multi Ch In Setup b ZONE Video Setup c ZONE Audio Setup d SR Setup f i LINK Check g Display Image HDMI Control R OFF D Return Finish 4 Select the HDMI Control setting you want e ON Enables the HDMI Control function When
203. le The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to any other program whose authors committo using it Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that you have You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them the
204. le the required form of the work that uses the Library must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it However as a special exception the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License and distribute such a combined library provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted and provided that you do these two things a Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library uncombined with any other library facilities This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above b Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library and explaining where to find the accomp
205. le Songs Shuffle Albums and Shuffle Off When browsing press to move to previous next levels t t During Audiobook playback press to switch the playback speed Faster gt Normal Slower TOP MENU Press to return to the iPod Top menu screen iPod CTRL Press to switch to the iPod controls Press again to return to the amplifier controls RETURN Press to return to the previous level 1 The controls of your iPod will be inoperable when connected to this amplifier Pioneer shows in the iPod display Features such as the equalizer cannot be controlled using this amplifier and we recommend switching the equalizer off before connecting 2 Note that with ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 non roman characters in the playlist are displayed as 3 If you re in the song category or video category you can also press ENTER to start playback 07 Other connections En Watching photos and video content To view photos or video on your iPod since video control is not possible using this amplifier you must use the main controls of your iPod instead 1 Set the operation selector switch to SOURCE then press iPod CTRL to switch to the iPod controls for photo and video playback The amplifier controls will be unavailable while you are watching iPod videos or browsing photos 2 Press iPod CTRL again to switch back to the amplifier controls when you re done Switching the iPod operation mode On this amplifier there are two iPod oper
206. lect each channel in turn and adjust the distance as necessary Use to adjust the delay of the speaker you selected to match the reference speaker The delay is measured in terms of speaker distance from 0 01 m to 9 00 m DVD LD 0 0dB DVD LD 0 0dB 3b Fine SP Distance 3b Fine SP Distance L SBL amp e SLA 3 05 m 1 m Be hee gt 8 A 23 A 34 B 24 B 36 lt Listen to the reference speaker and use it to measure the target channel From the listening position face the two speakers with your arms outstretched pointing at each speaker Try to make the two tones sound as if they are arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in front of you and between your arm span o s Q Los When it sounds like the delay settings are matched up press to confirm and continue to the next channel e For comparison purposes the reference speaker will change depending on which speaker you select e f you want to go back and adjust a channel simply use f to select it 4 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu Fine adjusting the positions of the speakers Precision Distance Before using this function perform the Auto MCACC Setup procedure see page 11 The auto MCACC speaker distance correction function corrects the distance to the speakers with a precision of 1 cm Here rather than correct the numerical v
207. m to the L2 SL A and R2 SR A terminals Center C ron left L Surround right A SRA Surround left A SL A Surround left B SL B Surround right B SR B Surround back left SBL Surround back right SBR If the center speaker is bi amp compatible make bi amp connections to achieve high quality sound 5 2 channel Bi amp connections Make bi amp connections using speakers that are all bi amp compatible Front Center C Front left L surf OUND Bad FRONT E Surround left SL Surround right SR 7 2 channel front Bi amp connections For details about the bil amp connections see B amping your speakers on page 62 When using only one surround back speaker connect it to the L4 Single terminals Make bi amp connections using speakers that are bi amp compatible for the front and center Front Center C Front right R left L Normal Surround left SL Surround right SR Surround Surround back right back left SBR SBL 7 2 channel Zone 2 connections When using only one surround back speaker connect it to the L4 Single terminals Front right R Front left L Front Front right R Center C left L
208. more on audio connections Note e The picture quality will change slightly during conversion HOME MEDIA GALLERY Symptoms Remedy Home Media Gallery NETWORK Configuration B Connect your HDMIl equipped component directly to the display using an HDMI cable Then use the most convenient connection digital is recommended for sending audio to the amplifier See the operating instructions for more on audio connections Set the display volume to minimum when using this configuration Note e f your display only has one HDMI terminal you can only receive HDMI video from the connected component e Depending on the component audio output may be limited to the number of channels available from the connected display unit for example audio output is reduced to 2 channels for a monitor with stereo audio limitations e f you want to switch the input source you ll have to switch functions on both the amplifier and your display unit e Since the sound is muted on the display when using the HDMI connection you must adjust the volume on the display every time you switch input sources No servers are found e Check the physical connections hub 1OOBASE TX 10BASE T or crossed cable and other cable quality when cabled directly to a PC It is strongly recommended to use 100BASE TX for playback quality and display speed e Check the logical connections IP Address setup DHCP etc Confirm the IP Address is correct i
209. mplifier outputs more test tones to determine the optimum amplifier settings for Channel Level Speaker Distance Standing Wave Acoustic Cal EQ and Full Band Phase Control Again try to be as quiet as possible while this is happening It may take 3 to 10 minutes 7 The Auto MCACC Setup has finished Press RETURN to go back to the System Setup menu Be sure to disconnect the microphone trom this amplifier upon completion of the Auto MCACC setup The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give you excellent surround sound from your system but it is also possible to adjust these settings manually using the System Setup menu starting on page 40 Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto MCACC Setup too much background noise echo off the walls obstacles blocking the speakers from the microphone the final settings may be incorrect Check for household appliances air conditioner fridge fan etc that may be affecting the environment and switch them off if necessary If there are any instructions showing in the front LCD display please follow them e Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the microphone If this seems to be happening switch off the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup Note Playing a source Here are the basic instructions for playing a source such as a DVD disc with your home theater system AV AMPLIFIER ten aa HOME ME
210. mute mode 7 Tuner component control buttons SETUP These button controls can be accessed after you have selected the corresponding input source button DVD DVR 1 TV etc Set the operation selector switch to AMP to access the following controls AUDIO PARAMETER Use to access the Audio options page 99 VIDEO PARAMETER Use to access the Video options page 101 SETUP Use to access the System Setup menu page 40 RETURN Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen also use to return to the previous menu with DVDs or to select closed captioning with DTV Controls and displays 8 t e ENTER Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround sound system see page 40 and the Audio or Video options page 99 or 101 Also used to control DVD menus options and for deck 1 of a double cassette deck player 9 Component control buttons The main buttons gt W etc are used to control a component after you have selected it using the input source buttons The controls above these buttons can be accessed after you have selected the corresponding input source button for example DVD DVR 1 or TV The following controls can be accessed when set the operation selector switch to AMP STATUS Press to check selected amplifier settings page 104 CH LEVEL Press repeatedly to select a channel then use to adjust the level page 53 10 amplifier controls STEREO F S SURR Switches between
211. n channels ensure better surround sound integration e HOME MEDIA GALLERY This amplifier can play back contents stored on your computer when your computer is connected to the LAN terminal of this amplifier It is also possible to play contents stored on USB devices e Dolby Digital and DTS decoding including Dolby Digital EX Dolby Pro Logic IIx DTS 96 24 DTS ES Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD DTS EXPRESS and DTS HD Master Audio Dolby Digital and DTS decoding brings theater sound right into your home with up to six channels of Surround sound including a special LFE Low Frequency Effects channel for deep realistic sound effects The built in Dolby Pro Logic Ilx and DTS Neo 6 decoders not only provide full Surround sound decoding for Dolby Surround sources but will also generate convincing surround sound for any stereo source Also with the addition of a surround back speaker you can take advantage of the built in Dolby Digital EX and DTS ES decoders for six channel Surround sound Furthermore Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD which are designed for the next generation high definition media such as Blu ray Disc and HD DVD Support up to 7 1 channels and 8 channels respectively DIS EXPRESS is a low bitrate encoding technology supporting up to 5 1 channels with fixed data transfer rates ranging from 24 kbps to 256 kbps this encoding is available only when signals are delivered to this amplifier as primary audio
212. n comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY for details type show w This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions type show c for details The hypothetical commands show w and show c should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License Of course the commands you use may be called something other than show w and show c they could even be mouse clicks or menu items whatever suits your program You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or your school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the program if necessary Here is a sample alter the names Yoyodyne Inc hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program Gnomovision which makes passes at compilers written by James Hacker signature of Ty Coon 1 April 1989 Ty Coon President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs If your program is a subroutine library you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library If this is what you want to do use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 February 1999 Copyright C 1991 1999 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 13807 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license documen
213. n press ENTER 6 Use t to select the proper code from the list then try using this remote with your component The code should start with the component type for example DVD 020 If there is more than one start with the first one 2 To try out the remote control switch the component on or off into standby by pressing SOURCEO If it doesn t seem to work select the next code from the list if there is one e f you can t find or properly enter a preset code you can still teach the remote individual commands from another remote control see Programming signals from other remote controls below 7 If your component is controlled successfully press ENTER to confirm The remote LCD display shows OK Programming signals from other remote controls If the preset code for your component is not available or the available preset codes do not operate correctly you can program signals from the remote control of another component This can also be used to program additional operations buttons not covered in the presets after assigning a preset code 1 While pressing the MULTI OPERATION button press SETUP The remote LCD display shows SETUP 2 Use f to select LEARNING then press ENTER The LCD on the remote prompts you for the component you want to control for example DVD or TV 1 You can t assign the TUNER iPod or HOME MEDIA GALLERY buttons 2 When using a Pioneer HDD recorder please select PIONEER DV
214. nalog outputs depending on whether your player Supports surround back channels Make sure that the player is set to output multichannel analog audio 1 Connect the front surround center and subwoofer outputs on your DVD player to the corresponding MULTI CH IN jack on this amplifier e Use standard RCA phono jack cables for the connections 2 If your DVD player also has outputs for surround back channels connect these to the corresponding MULTI CH IN jacks on this amplifier e Use standard RCA phono jack cables for the connections e If there is a single surround back output connect it to the SURROUND BACK L Single jack on this amplifier Selecting the multichannel analog inputs If you have connected a decoder or a DVD player as above you must select the analog multichannel inputs for Surround sound playback With MULTI CH IN inputs it is possible to switch the number of channels of the input signal according to the connected components For example when only two channels of audio signals are being input to the MULTI CH IN terminals switch the number of playback channels to 2 ch using the SIGNAL SEL button INPUT SELECT SIGNAL SEL w SOURCE AMP 1 To listen to multichannel analog audio you ll need to switch the input signal selector to MULTI CH IN see Se ecting the multichannel analog inputs above for more on this 2 When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected only the volume and channel lev
215. ncies 63Hz 125Hz 250Hz 500Hz 1kHz 2kHz 4kHz 8kHz and 16kHz Select the setting from the following time periods in milliseconds 0 20ms 10 30ms 20 40ms 30 50ms 40 60ms 50 70ms and 60 80ms This setting will be applied to all channels during calibration When you re finished select START It will take about 2 to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set you are given the option to check the settings on screen Full Band Phase Control The Full Band Phase Control feature calibrates the trequency phase characteristics of the speakers connected and corrects the phase distortion This amplifier analyzes the frequency phase characteristics of the speakers by calibrating test signals output from the speakers with the supplied microphone therefore flattening the analyzed trequency phase characteristics during audio signal playback This correction minimizes group delay between the middle and low frequency ranges and improves the frequency phase characteristics across all ranges Furthermore the enhanced frequency phase characteristics between channels ensure better surround sound integration for multichannel sources For details see Using Full Band Phase Contro on page 14 1 The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected To use another MCACC preset exit the System Setup menu and press MCACC to select it before p
216. nding Wave MCACC M1 MEMORY 1 DVD LD 3 Manual MCACC a Fine Channel Level b Fine SP Distance Filter Ch c Precision Distance RIM e EQ Adjust f EQ Professional m 12 0 Return 2 Adjust the parameters for the Standing Wave Control e Filter Ch Select the channel to which you will apply the filter s MAIN all except center channel and subwoofer Center or SW subwoofer TRIM on y available when the filter channel above is SW Adjust the subwoofer channel level to compensate for the difference in output post filter e f Q ATT These are the filter parameters where f represents the frequency you will be targeting and Q is the bandwidth the higher the Q the narrower the bandwidth or range of the attenuation ATT the amount of reduction to the targeted frequency 3 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu 1 If the microphone is placed in a different position from when the Auto MCACC procedure was performed it may not be possible to adjust properly In this case we recommend performing the procedure at Fine Speaker Distance on page 45 in the Auto MCACC custom measurements then performing the adjustment described here without moving the microphone e The adjustment here is for adjusting for an error of 1 cm or less not adjustable with the Auto MCACC Setup 0 0 may be displayed after distance correction with the Auto MCACC Setup but even
217. nect any speakers that are connected directly to the amplifier e f you re not using a Subwoofer change the front speaker setting see Speaker Setting on page 52 to large 07 Other connections En MULTI ZONE listening This amplifier can power up to three independent systems in separate rooms after you have made the proper MULTI ZONE connections An example MULTI ZONE setup is shown below but the number of MULTI ZONE connections and the way you choose to connect them depends on how you want to set up your system Sub zone ZONE 3 Sub zone ZONE 2 AUDIO IN DIGITAL IN AUDIO d Different sources can be playing in three zones at the same time or depending on your needs the same source can also be used The main and sub zones have independent power the main zone power can be off while one or both of the sub zones is on and the sub zones can be controlled by the remote or front panel controls However you may need to specify the volume settings in ZONE Audio Setup on page 97 Making MULTI ZONE connections It is possible to make these connections if you have a separate TV and speakers for your primary ZONE 2 sub zone and a separate amplifier and speakers for your secondary ZONE 3 sub zone You will also need a separate amplifier if you selected an option other than 7 2ch ZONE 2 in the speaker output in Speaker output setting on page 43 for your primary sub zone There are t
218. ng is correct for all soeakers see Speaker Distance on page 54 Noise or hum can be heard even Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the same power source are not when there is no sound being causing interference input Additional information Symptom Remedy There seems to be a time lag e See Automatically setting up for surround sound MCACC amp Full Band Phase Control on page 11 to set up between the speakers and the your system again using MCACC this will automatically compensate for a delay in the subwoofer output output of the subwoofer Can t use the SR features e Make sure that HDMI Control is set to OFF see Setting the HDMI Control mode on page 92 The maximum volume available This is not a malfunction If the levels in Channel Level on page 53 have been adjusted the maximum shown in the front LCD display volume will change accordingly is lower than the 12dB maximum No sound is output from the CD e Make sure that ZONE 3 RECSEL Setting in the ZONE Audio Setup menu is set to RECSEL see ZONE R TAPE MD OUT DVR VCR 1 Audio Setup on page 97 OUT or DVR VCR 2 OUT jack Can t select ZONE 3 e Make sure that ZONE 3 RECSEL Setting in the ZONE Audio Setup menu is set to ZONE 3 see ZONE Audio Setup on page 97 Video Symptom Remedy No image is outoutwhen an input Check the video connections of the source component see page 23 is selected
219. ngth then the use of the object file is unrestricted regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6 Otherwise if the work is a derivative of the Library you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6 whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself As an exception to the Sections above you may also combine or link a work that uses the Library with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library and distribute that work under terms of your choice provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License You must supply a copy of this License If the work during execution displays copyright notices you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License Also you must do one of these things a Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above
220. nt movie soundtrack SRC Creates a wider dynamic range with ON Sampling digital sources like CDs or DVDs OFF Rate Conversion DUAL Specifies how dual mono encoded CH1 MONO Dolby Digital soundtracks shouldbe Channel 1 is played Dual mono is not widely heard only used but is sometimes necessary CHO when two languages need to be sent Channel 26 to separate channels heard only CH1 CH2 Both channels heard from front speakers DRC Adjusts the level of dynamic range AUTO Dynamic for movie soundtracks optimized for Range Dolby Digital DTS Dolby Digital MAX Control Plus Dolby TrueHD DTS HD and MID DTS HD Master Audio you may OFF need to use this feature when listening to Surround sound at low volumes ED Using other functions En Setting What it does LFE Some Dolby Digital and DTS audio LFE sources include ultra low bass Attenuate tones Set the LFE attenuator as necessary to prevent the ultra low bass tones from distorting the sound from the speakers The LFE is not limited when set to 0 dB which is the recommended value When set to 5 dB 10 dB 15 dB or 20 dB the LFE is limited by the respective degree When OFF is selected no sound is output from the LFE channel When the surround speaker is set to DELAY the array mode delay processing is Adjusting applied to the surround B channel the This delay can be adjusted to surround B achieve a sound field with a mo
221. nu Stops the Music Player Fast gt See the key guide table Forward lt lt gt gt Fast Reverse Moves Up f See the key guide table Down a cursor Play ENTER gt See the key guide table A B Repeat AUTO See the key guide table Mode DIRECT Blue Repeat STEREO See the key guide table Mode F S SURR Red Random STANDARD See the key guide table Mode Green Tool Menu ADV SURR See the key guide table Yellow e Setup procedures for the above play modes are the same as for the Movie Player 08 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs e Refer to page 75 for the color button ADV SURR Yellow Tool Menu Note e Some functions may not be supported depending on the server type or version used e Playback continues even when you move from the Player screen to the previously selected screen by pressing RETURN A B Repeat Mode 1 While playing content press AUTO DIRECT Blue where you want repeat to start 2 Press AUTO DIRECT Blue again where you want repeat to end The Player status appears on the screen and the A B repeat mode icon changes The selected part of the title is repeatedly played back To return to normal mode press AUTO DIRECT Blue again while in the A B repeat mode Note e The A B repeat function is only available during playback in normal mode Repeat Mode 1 While playing content in the Media Navigator USB device or Playlist press STEREO F S SURR Red to
222. nual MCACC b Memory Rename 4 FULL BAND PHASE CTRL c MCACC Memory Copy d MCACC Memory Clear e Output PC 6 Manual SP Setup 7 Input Setup 8 OSD Language 9 Other Setup 2 Select the setting you want to adjust e MCACC Data Check Check the settings for any of your MCACC presets using the on screen display see Checking MCACC preset data on page 51 e Memory Rename Name your MCACC presets for easy identification see Renaming MCACCT presets on page 51 e MCACC Memory Copy Copy settings from one MCACC preset to another see Copying MCACC preset data on page 51 e MCACC Memory Clear Clear any MCACC presets that you don t want see Clearing MCACT presets on page 51 e Output PC See Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 69 for more on this 1 When Measurement is selected and set and speaker phase disturbance is corrected the Full Band Phase Control function automatically turns on 2 When your PC is connected to this amplifier the original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the corrected characteristics of group delay can be displayed in 3 dimension on your PC 3 The subwoofer is excluded from correction The super tweeter in the super high frequency range is excluded from correction Also speakers theoretically unaffected by group delay full range speakers for instance are excluded from correction Because calibration involves the spatial characteristics you
223. number of factors room size speaker placement etc this may occur in some cases Change the speaker setting manually in Soeaker Setting on page 52 and use the ALL Keep SP System option for the Custom Menu in Automatic MCACC Expert on page 40 if this is a recurring problem En Additional information symptom Remedy O O Symptom Remedy Can t adjust the Fine Speaker e Check that the speakers are all in phase make sure the positive and negative terminals are Distance setting page 45 matched up properly properly The display shows KEY LOCK e With the amplifier in standby press STANDBY ON while holding down the SPEAKERS button to ON when you try to make disable the key lock settings Most recent settings have been The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting erased Professional Calibration EQ graphical output Symptom Remedy The EQ response displayed inthe e There are cases where the graph does not appear flat even when selecting ALL CH ADJUST in the Auto graphical output following MCACC Setup due to adjustments made to compensate for room characteristics to achieve optimal sound calibration does not appear e Areas of the graph may appear identical before and after when there is little or no adjustment needed entirely flat e The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and after measurements EQ adjustments m
224. o Logic Il GAME Oo PRO LOGIC Neo 6 CINEMA Neo 6 MUSIC Do PRO LOGIC Neo 6 CINEMA Neo 6 MUSIC Neural THX THX Oo PRO LOGIC THX OO Pro Logic Il MOVIE THX CINEMA OO Pro Logic Il MUSIC THX MUSIC DO Pro Logic Il GAME THX GAMES Neo 6 MUSIC THX MUSIC Neo 6 CINEMA THX THX CINEMA THX MUSIC THX GAMES Oo PRO LOGIC THX OO Pro Logic Il MOVIE THX CINEMA OO Pro Logic Il MUSIC THX MUSIC OO Pro Logic Il GAME THX GAMES Neo 6 MUSIC THX MUSIC Neo 6 CINEMA THX DO Pro Logic Il MOVIE OO Pro Logic Il MUSIC DO Pro Logic Il GAME Neo 6 MUSIC THX MUSIC DO PRO LOGIC Il MUSIC THX MUSIC OO Pro Logic Il MOVIE THX CINEMA Neo 6 MUSIC THX MUSIC OO Pro Logic Il GAME THX GAMES OO Pro Logic Il MUSIC THX MUSIC Neo 6 CINEMA THX Oo PRO LOGIC THX a No sound is output from the surround back speakers when D0 Pro Logic is selected b Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected c This is only selectable when the input signal is an analog or PCM signal d Automatically selected if no surround back speakers are connected Auto Surround Stereo playback As above DO Pro Logic Il MOVIE Neo 6 CINEMA Stereo playback Stereo playback Additional information Multichannel signal formats SBch Processing Input signal format SBch Dolby Digital Plus Processing Dolby TrueHD ON DTS HD 7 1 channel DTS HD Master Audio decoding used for WMAS9 Pro all sources 44 1 kHz 48 kHz PCM
225. o one of the optical inputs on this amplifier using an optical cable When you set up the amplifier you ll need to tell the amplifier which input you connected the player to see The Input Setup menu on page 94 Connecting your equipment 03 Connecting your Blu ray disc player SC LX90 OUT1 HDMI CTRL NE NA NE Ng NB ING a eo QE ee oe Blu ray disc player The diagram shows a basic setup of this amplifier together with a Blu ray disc player with S Video or composite video connections See also Using the component video jacks on page 24 if your Blu ray disc player has component video inputs outputs If your Blu ray disc player offers multi channel analog audio outputs see Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 60 1 Connect a composite video output on your Blu ray disc player to the BD VIDEO input Connect using a standard video cable or an S Video cable 2 Connect an coaxial type digital audio output on your Blu ray disc player to the COAXIAL IN 2 BD input Use a coaxial cable designed for digital audio 3 Connect the stereo audio outputs on your Blu ray disc player to the BD AUDIO inputs Connect using a stereo RCA phono jack cable e f your Blu ray disc player has multi channel analog outputs you can connect these instead See also Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 60 Note 1 See The Input Setup menu on page 94 to assign the S VIDEO input to th
226. o playback a different component This could let you for example use the remote control to set up and listen to a CD on the amplifier and then use the remote control to rewind a tape in your VCR while you continue to listen to your CD player When direct function is on any component you select using the input source buttons will be selected by both the amplifier and the remote control When you turn direct function off you can operate the remote control without affecting the amplifier 1 While pressing the MULTI OPERATION button press SETUP The remote LCD display shows SETUP 2 Use f to select DIRECT F then press ENTER The LCD on the remote prompts you for the button of the input Source you want to control 3 Press the input source button for the component you want to control then press ENTER 4 Use f to switch direct function ON or OFF then press ENTER The LCD shows OK to confirm the setting Multi Operation and System Off The Multi Operation feature allows you to program a series of up to 5 commands for the components in your system For example you could turn on your TV turn on your DVD player and start playing the loaded DVD using only two buttons on the remote control Similar to multi operations System Off allows you to use one button to stop and switch off a series of components in your system at the same time 1 Before Multi Operation and System Off will work correctly you must setup the
227. ode between Random Off and Random On Displays the Tool Menu If the Tool Menu is displayed while a slideshow is played the slideshow and BGM are paused DISP Displays the Player status at the bottom of the screen while image content is played Another press of the key displays a key guide as well No Player information is displayed when an image is shown in full screen no slideshow has been started Other information may display Pressing the key once more cancels all the information display ADV SURR Yellow VOL VOL MUTE Adjusts the sound volume Mutes the sound Play modes BGM Setup Tool Menu Sets up BGM Slide Show Tool Menu Allows various slideshow setups on the Setup Photo player Add toMy Tool Menu Adds the selected content to My Playlist Playlist List Stop Photo W RETURN Stops the Photo Player Player Move File B See the key guide table Forward gt Backward Slideshow ENTER gt See the key guide table Play modes Rotate AUTO See the key guide table DIRECT Blue lt lt gt gt Repeat STEREO See the key guide table Mode F S SURR Red Random STANDARD See the key guide table Mode Green Tool Menu ADV SURR See the key guide table Yellow e Setup procedures for the above play modes are the same as for the Movie Player e Refer to page 75 for the color button ADV SURR Yellow Tool Menu Note e Some functions may not be supported depending on the
228. oked then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that in the event an application does not supply such function or table the facility still operates and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful For example a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well defined independent of the application Therefore Subsection 2d requires that any application supplied function or table used by this function must be optional if the application does not supply it the square root function must still compute square roots These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library In addition mere aggregation of another work no
229. on this refer to Using surround back channel processing on page 37 e If you press ADV SURR when the headphones are connected the PHONES SURROUND mode will automatically be selected 3 Use with Dolby Pro Logic for a stereo surround effect stereo field is wider than Standard modes with Dolby Digital sources 05 Listening to your system En Listening in stereo When you select STEREO you will hear the source through just the front left and right speakers and possibly your subwoofer depending on your speaker settings Dolby Digital DTS and WMA9 Pro multichannel sources are downmixed to stereo e While listening to a source press STEREO F S SURR for stereo playback Press repeatedly to switch between e STEREO The audio is heard with your surround settings and you can still use the Midnight Loudness and Tone functions e F S SURR FOCUS See Using Front Stage Surround Advance below for more on this e F S SURR WIDE See Using Front Stage Surround Advance below for more on this Using Front Stage Surround Advance The Front Stage Surround Advance function allows you to create natural surround sound effects using just the front speakers and the subwoofer STEREO F S SURR e While listening to a source press STEREO F S SURR to select Front Stage Surround Advance modes e STEREO See Listening in stereo above for more on this e F S SURR FOCUS Use to provide a rich surround sound effect directed
230. on of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license Most GNU software including some libraries is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License This license the GNU Lesser General Public License applies to certain designated libraries and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non free programs When a program is linked with a library whether statically or using a shared library the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work a derivative of the original library The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library We call this license the Lesser General Public License because it does Less to protect the user s freedom than the ordinary General Public License It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non free programs These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries However the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances For example on rare occasions there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library so that it becomes a de facto standard
231. onizing function 5 39 06 The System Setup menu Making amplifier settings trom the System Setup MENU ee es 40 Automate WiGACGNE el 4404 240408 teriris ceded 40 Speaker output Setting ee 43 Manual MCACG SEUD ia daeangstomciee deki bah beet 44 Rne channel Levele restare tanieteiria e ra 44 Fine Speaker Distance ee 45 Fine adjusting the positions of the speakers Precision DISTATICE an cx ose a ge ea ee CR ROE aR DOS A5 OS VEe ann bce tee ee veda ew re es eG eee a 46 Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust 00 47 Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional 47 Full Band Phase Control 0 ccc ee es AQ Data Management ce da 4 0 4 ee ao dew Bo bw Oe a 50 Manual speaker setup 6 ee 52 Speaker SEWING re re ae de doctor dave 49 ead eee ws 52 Channel Level acc ode acdeu aot dot aa Da Speaker Distance naaa aa a 54 PCy sre eee ee ph ae te ook Ee ea 54 Ti PUNO SOWING escoi neat cee ereee ease ee tee 54 07 Other connections CONMECUNG SH IPO tesir eivetedeeereeke eeeeads 56 Connecting your iPod to the amplifier 56 IP OOM DIAC a cae eaee bk be be S OET o7 Watching photos and video content 08 58 Switching the iPod operation mode 065 J0 Using The INVITE ACE cau a ace aa ee das due ae 58 Checking the LINKIN DULS lt ccnnteaieadewewee as 59 A OOUT LEINE 4c hoot nnwehaee ae ee eroeaeeeenn8s 59 AOUT POLS rate COMING 404 rererirrristrrniagi 59 Creating an i LINK network
232. onnect the iPod to the iPod to the amplifier amplifier If this doesn t seem to work try resetting your iPod Error I2 The software version being used with the iPod Update the software being used with the iPod please use the needs to be updated latest iPod software versions later than the iPod updater 2004 10 20 Error 3 When operation is not possible with the iPod Switch the iPod operation mode set to Type 2 page 58 operation mode set to Type 1 When the iPod software version is too old Update the iPod software to the latest version Error 14 When there is no response from the iPod Update the iPod software to the latest version No Music Track There are no playable songs currently stored in Input some music files compatible with iPod playback When the iPod you want to play videos press iPod CTRL to play the video track using the controls on the iPod No Track When there are no tracks in the category Select a different category selected on the iPod i LINK messages You may see the following messages displayed in the front LCD display when using the i LINK interface Message Explanation BUS FULL The i LINK bus has reached its capacity and cannot transmit any more data CANNOT LINK 1 The connection between the amplifier and the selected i LINK equipped component is unstable If the i LINK cables appear to be connected properly and both the amplifier and i LINK equipped component are on switch both units off then on aga
233. ontrol Setup menu Select EXIT again to exit Using multi operations You can start multi operations with the amplifier switched on or in standby MULTI OPERATION 1 Press MULTI OPERATION MULTI OP flashes in the display 2 Press an input source button that has been set up with a multi operation The amplifier switches on if it was in standby and the programmed multi operation is performed automatically En gt Controlling the rest of your system En Using System off SOURCE ee MULTI OPERATION 1 Press MULTI OPERATION MULTI OP flashes in the display 2 Press SOURCEO The command sequence you programmed will run then all Pioneer components will switch off followed by this amplifier Controls for TVs This remote control can control components after entering the proper codes or teaching the amplifier the commands see Setting the remote to control other components on page 106 for more on this Set the operation selector switch to SOURCE then press the other device operation button of the device you want to operate e The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote control are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV button Button s Function Components TVO Press to switch the component Cable TV Satellite assigned to the TV button onor TVAV off INPUT Switches the TV input Not Cable TV Satellite possible with all models TV TV TV CH Selects channels Cable TV Satellite TV TV TV
234. oofer e Center Select LARGE if your center speaker reproduces bass frequencies effectively or select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer If you didn t connect a center speaker choose NO the center channel is sent to the front speakers e Surr Select LARGE if your surround speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or Subwoofer If you didn t connect surround speakers choose NO the sound of the surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a Subwoofer e SB Select the number of surround back speakers you have one two or none Select LARGE if your surround back speakers reproduce bass frequencies effectively Select SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer If you didn t connect surround back speakers choose NO 2 Ifyou select SMALL for the front speakers the subwoofer will automatically be fixed to YES Also the center and surround speakers can t be set to LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL In this case all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer 3 Surr A and Surr B can be set when Output Setup is set to Normal 4 lf you selected All Ch Bi Amp in Speaker output setting on page 43 you can t adjust the surround back settings e If the surround speakers are set to NO the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO e If you select one surround back
235. or DVD BD DVR O channel player AAA STANDARD Switches tothe VCR controlswhen VCR DVD DVR using a VCR DVD HDD recorder player 000 DISP Press to display information DVD BD DVR Ea player AUTO Switches to the hard disk controls DVR player DIRECT when using a DVD HDD recorder STEREO Switches to the DVD controls DVR player when using a DVD HDD recorder SETUP Displays the HOME MENU DVD BD DVR 3 Continue the chain in the same way for as many paa components as you have CLR Use as the CLEAR button DVD BD player Select chapters higher than 10 LD DVR player Note 1 Ifyou want to control all your components using this amplifier s remote control see Setting the remote to control other components on page 106 e If you have connected a remote control to the CONTROL IN jack using a mini plug cable you won t be able to control this unit using the remote sensor e See Using this amplifier with a Pioneer plasma television on page 68 if you are connecting a Pioneer plasma television En EE Additional information En Chapter 13 Additional information Speaker Setting Guide In order to achieve an even better surround effect it is important to accurately position the speakers and make their volume and tone characteristics uniform so as to finely focus the multi channel sound The three major elements in positioning the speakers are distance angle and orientation the direction in which the speakers a
236. or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to retrain entirely from distribution of the Library If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to de
237. or cable 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed 2 Select USB t then ENTER The Device List is displayed on screen with the selected device highlighted if you have not checked in the Single Server USB box after selecting Setup and then Auto Connection Setup If you have checked in the box the list is skipped 3 Select the desired device then ENTER You can select a device only when the Device List is displayed 4 Press ENTER to navigate to a folder or play a file content To return to the previous screen press RETURN Note e Ifthe Home Media Gallery is launched and the Single Server USB box is checked after selecting Setup and then Auto Connection Setup the system displays the root directory immediately after inserting a USB device In this case you can start from step 4 When a multi card reader is inserted the Device List appears with the selected device highlighted In this case you can start from step 3 1 Compatible USB devices include external magnetic hard drives portable flash memory particularly keydrives and digital audio players MP3 players of format FAT16 32 It is not possible to connect this unit to a personal computer for USB playback e Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility operation and or bus power with all USB mass storage devices and assumes no responsibility for any loss of data that may occur when connected to this amplifier Readable US
238. or details see Switching the speaker system according to the playback environment Application Manual on page 62 2 e You can t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this amplifier or when any of the THX stereo Front Stage Surround Advance or Stream Direct mode is selected e You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the SB setting is set to NO in the Speaker Setting on page 52 or All Ch Bi Amp is selected in the Speaker output setting on page 43 e The Virtual Surround Back mode cannot be applied to sources that do not have surround channel information Listening to your system SBch Standard THX Type OT Source Virtual se Mutti d yP Virtual s Multichannel surround mode sources O0 Pro Logic Iix OO Pro Logic Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD WMAQ9 ON o o Pro 44 1 kHz 48 kHz encoded stereo 7 sources AUTO DTS HD Master Audio DTS HD ON DTS EXPRESS WMA9 Pro 88 2 kHz 96 AUT kHz encoded stereo sources UTO a Only applicable when using the Virtual Surround Back mode b Not applicable when using the Virtual Surround Back mode c Sound is output from the surround back speakers only when THX Ultra2 CINEMA THX MUSIC or THX GAMES is selected d Advanced surround mode may not be available depending on the input signal Using the genre synchronizing function This feature automatically selects the most appropriate
239. or with the same type of cable composite or component 3 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Other Setup menu ZONE Audio Setup If you ve made MULTI ZONE connections see MULTI ZONE listening on page 64 you may need to specify your volume setting 1 Select ZONE Audio Setup from the Other Setup menu DVD LD 55 0dB DVD LD 9 Other Setup 9c ZONE Audio Setup 55 0dB a Multi Ch In Setup b ZONE Video Setup d SR Setup e HDMI Control Setup f i LINK Check g Display Image ZONE 3 RECSEL Settin ZONE 3 IS ZONE 2 Volume Level Variable ZONE 3 Volume Level Variable Return Finsh 2 Select the ZONE 3 RECSEL Setting you want You can select the ZONE 3 or RECSEL setting e ZONE 3 Sound is output from AUDIO ZONE3 OUT jack e RECSEL Sound is output from the CD R TAPE MD OUT DVR VCR 1 OUT or DVR VCR 2 OUT jack For details see Playing a different source when recording on page 102 3 Select the volume level setting of ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 e Variable Use this setting if you ve connected a power amplifier in the sub room this amplifier is simply being used as a pre amp and you will be using this amplifier s controls to adjust the volume e Fixed Use this setting if you ve connected a fully integrated amplifier Such as another Pioneer VSX amplifier in the sub room and want to use that amplifier s volume controls With the Fixed
240. ore natural Surround sound Setting the Video options There are anumber of additional picture settings you can make using the VIDEO PARAMETER menu The defaults if not stated are listed in bold A Important e Note that if an option cannot be selected on the VIDEO PARAMETER menu it is unavailable due to the current source setting and status of the amplifier 1 Press VIDEO PARAMETER 2 Use t to select the setting you want to adjust Depending on the current status mode of the amplifier certain options may not be able to be selected Check the table below for notes on this 3 Use to set it as necessary See the table below for the options available for each setting Note 4 Setting What it does Option s VIDEO Converts video signals for output ON CONV from the MONITOR OUT jacks for ee OFF Digital all video types Video Conversion BRIGHTNESS Adjusts the overall brightness 10 to 10 Default 0 CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast between light 10 to 10 and dark Default 0 HUE Adjusts the red green balance 10 to 10 Default 0 CHROMA Adjusts saturation from dull to 10 to 10 LEVEL bright Default 0 NR Setting for reducing roughness of 0 the picture 10 5 HOT 10 RESOLUTION Specifies the output resolution of AUTO the video signal when analog video PURE input signals are output atthe HDMI OUT connector and or component 4801 5761 video out terminal select thi
241. ory SOUND Some monitors have a slight delay 0 0 to 6 0 DELAY when showing video so the frames soundtrack will be slightly out of 1 second 25 sync with the picture By adding a frames PAL bit of delay you can adjust the Default 0 0 sound to match the presentation of the video MIDNIGHT Allows you to hear effective MID LOUD Surround sound of movies at low OFF une MIDNIGHT ON LOUDNESS Used to get good bass and treble LOUDNESS ON from music sources at low volumes Setting What it does Option s TONE Applies the treble and bass tone BYPASS Tone controls to a source or bypasses ON Control them completely BASS Adjusts the amount of bass 6 to 6 dB Default 0 dB TREBLE Adjusts the amount of treble 6 to 6 dB Default 0 dB S RETRIEVER When audio data is removed during OFF Sound the WMA MP3 MPEG 4 AAC ON Retriever compression process sound quality often suffers from an uneven sound image The Sound Retriever feature employs new DSP technology that helps bring CD quality sound back to compressed 2 channel audio by restoring sound pressure and smoothing jagged artifacts left over after compression DNR May improve the quality of sound in OFF Digital a noisy source for example ON Noise cassette or video tape with lots of Reduction background noise when switched on DIALOGE Localizes dialog in the center OFF Dialog channel to make it stand out from ON Enhance other background sounds ina TV or me
242. osite video jack or for higher quality video use an S Video cable to connect to the S Video jack 2 Connect a composite or S Video output on your DVD player to the DVD LD VIDEO or DVD LD S VIDEO input Connect using a standard video cable or an S Video cable 3 Connect a coaxial type digital audio output on your DVD player to the COAXIAL IN 1 DVD LD input Use a coaxial cable designed for digital audio Note COO Ooo DAA Pr Ps Yag PN An 6 OUT OVDLD IN RECI BD O lt CD R nE VIDEO na cD DVR i y NE SA 7X fm JIS VIDEO GAME1 IN O VIDEO VIDEO __ S VIDEO IN IN TV 4 Connect the stereo audio outputs on your DVD player to the DVD LD AUDIO inputs Connect using a stereo RCA phono jack cable e f your DVD player has multichannel analog outputs you can connect these instead See also Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 60 5 If the source component is an LD player with a 00 RF digital audio output connect this to the RF IN input on this amplifier To ensure compatibility with all laserdiscs connect both the PCM and OO RF outputs from your LD player e Use a coaxial cable designed for digital audio for the DO RF connection e You may need to assign the RF IN digital input when setting up the amplifier see also The Input Setup menu on page 94 1 If your DVD player only has an optical digital output you can connect it t
243. output that can be displayed on screen or using a computer with software available trom Pioneer see Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACCT output on page 69 How to interpret the graphical output The graph shows decibels on the vertical axis and time in milliseconds on the horizontal axis A straight line indicates a flat response room no reverb whereas a sloping line indicates the presence of reverberation when outputting test tones The sloping line will eventually flatten out when the reverberant sound stabilizes this usually takes about 100 ms or So By analyzing the graph you should be able to see how your room is responding to certain frequencies Differences in channel level and speaker distance are taken into account automatically compensation is provided for comparison purposes and the frequency measurements can be examined both with and without the equalization performed by this amplifier 1 When EQ Adjust is selected for a MCACC preset memory where EQ is set to OFF in the AUDIO PARAMETER EQ ON is automatically selected 2 This system allows you to customize your system calibration with the help of a graphical output that can be displayed on screen or using a computer with software available from Pioneer see Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 69 for more on this 3 Note that due to an effect known as group delay lower frequencies will take longer to be generated than higher frequencies t
244. p 60Hz l j g l OUTPUT __ 10801 7 60Hz Output signal Aspect ratio SUASPECT 4 3 l 7 naktosuhich setting erminal to whic video signal is being input e MULTI ZONE status DVD LD 55 0dB STATUS ZONE lt ZONE INFORMATION gt Zone 2 setting and input ZONE 3 OFF Poa Zone 3 setting and RECOUT setting o input ED Using other functions e This amplifier s settings information DVD LD 55 0dB STATUS SYSTEM lt SYSTEM INFORMATION gt MCACC memory eee naros an or Analog ATT sep timer R P spy setting e OFF DVD LD 55 0dB STATUS OFF 2 When you re finished press STATUS again to switch off the display Resetting the system Use this procedure to reset all the amplitier s settings to the factory default Use the front panel controls to do this 1 Switch the amplifier into standby 2 While holding down the SETUP button on the front panel press STANDBY ON The display shows RESET NO 3 Press the ENTER button on the front panel 4 Select RESET using then press the ENTER button on the front panel The display shows RESET OK 5 Press ENTER to confirm OK appears in the display to indicate that the amplifier has been reset to the factory default settings e Note that all settings will be saved even if the amplifier is unplugged Using other functions Default system settings Setting Default Do PL II Music Options Center Width 3 HDMI A
245. p digital home products that share content through wired or wireless networks in the home DNS Domain Name Service Server DNS Server is a server that determines the name of network computer within the Internet The server functions to exchange IP address to the hostname hostname to the IP address Ethernet A frame based computer networking technology for local area networks LANs This amplifier supports 100BASE TX IP Internet Protocol Address A unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard such as 192 168 1 xxx No duplicate numbers are allowed within the network Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs CH LAN Cable A cable that has an eight pin modular plug on each end and is different from a telephone plug which has four pins A straight cable is used when connecting this amplifier to a home network via a hub A cross over cable is used when connecting directly to a PC Use category 5 CAT 5 LAN cables MAC Media Access Control Address An address attached to the port of any network device with an IP address The MAC address is expressed as 00 e0 36 xx xx xx and cannot be changed Mass Storage Class devices The standard provides an interface to a variety of storage devices such as USB flash drive and digital cameras PlaysForSure This unit incorporates PlaysForSure PlaysForSure is a new logo program
246. party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License also called this License Each licensee is addressed as you A library means a collection of software functions and or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs which use some of those functions and data to form executables Additional information The Library below refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms A work based on the Library means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Library or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated straightforwardly into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For a library complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library indepen
247. pment 03 9 Multichannel analog audio inputs 20 Speaker terminals 7 1 channel inputs for connection to a DVD player with Use for connection to the main front center surround multichannel analog outputs and surround back speakers See Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on See nstalling your speaker system on page 27 page 60 21 AC power inlet 10 Stereo analog audio source inputs outputs x5 Connect the supplied power cord here Use for connection to audio sources such as CD players tape decks turntables etc See Connecting analog audio sources on page 26 When making cable connections 11 Audio video source inputs outputs x7 e To avoid hum do not lay connected cables over the Use for connection to audio visual sources such as DVD top of the amplifier players recorders VCRs etc Each set of inputs has jacks for composite video S Video and stereo analog audio See Connecting a DVD HDD recorder VCR and other video sources on page 23 12 Composite S Video and Component monitor outputs Use to connect monitors and IVs e When connecting optical cables be careful when See Connecting your TV and DVD player on page 20 inserting the plug not to damage the shutter See Using the component video jacks on page 24 protecting the optical socket 13 MULTI ZONE video outputs Use to connect monitors or TVs in a separate room See MULTI ZONE listening on page 64 14 12 V trigger jacks tot
248. pointing all the speakers towards an area 30 cm to 80 cm behind the listening position between the surround speakers and the listening position However the sense of sound positioning can differ according to the conditions in the room and the speakers being used In smaller environments in particular when the front speakers are close to the listening position with this method the speakers will be pointed too inward We suggest you use this example of installation as reference when trying out different installation methods Additional information CH tip e When adjusting the orientation of the speakers turn the speakers with the center of the speakers baffle surfaces as the axis so that the speakers center positions do not change The central axes converge 30 cm to 80 cm behind the listening position Examples of recommended speaker layouts based on the ITU R Fig 1 for systems with more than 5 1 channels e For 7 1 channel or 7 2 channel systems The central axes converge 30 cm to 80 cm behind the listening position e For 9 1 channel or 9 2 channel systems The central axes converge 30 cm to 80 cm behind the listening position Step 4 Positioning and adjusting the subwoofer Placing the subwoofer between the center and front speakers makes even music Sources Sound more natural If there is only one subwoofer it doesn t matter if it is placed on the left or right side The low bass sound
249. ponents Most components can be assigned to one of the input source buttons such as DVD or CD using the component s manufacturer preset code stored in the remote However there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote control will not work for the model that you are using If you can t find a preset code that matches the component you want to control you can still teach the remote individual commands trom another remote control see Programming signals from other remote controls below Note e You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing MULTI OPERATION To go back a step press RETURN e After one minute of inactivity the remote automatically exits the operation Selecting preset codes directly MAIN vod SD EAN feo oe HOME MEDIA cD D wm cp 1 While pressing the MULTI OPERATION button press SETUP The remote LCD display shows SETUP 2 Use t to select PRESET then press ENTER 3 Press the input source button for the component you want to control then press ENTER The LCD on the remote displays the component you want to control for example DVD or Tv Note 4 Use f to select the first letter of the brand name of your component then press ENTER This should be the manufacturer s name for example P for Pioneer 5 Use t to select the manufacturer s name from the list the
250. ponents with EN SHUI SG N O cry na oo aa e A 111 Before you start Chapter 1 Before you start Checking what s in the box An accessory box is supplied with this amplifier It can be used to store the supplied accessories other than the Warranty card Please check that you ve received the following supplied accessories e Setup microphone cable 5 m e Remote control unit AA IEC ROP dry cell batteries x2 e iPod control cable e Power cord e Wiping cloth e Warranty card e These operating instructions Installing the amplifier e When installing this unit make sure to put it on a level and stable surface Don t install it on the following places onacolor IV the screen may distort near a cassette deck or close to a device that gives off a magnetic field This may interfere with the sound in direct sunlight in damp or wet areas in extremely hot or cold areas in places where there is vibration or other movement in places that are very dusty in places that have hot fumes or oils Such as a kitchen e Do not touch this amplifier s bottom panel while the power is turned on The bottom panel gets hot when the power is on and touching it could cause burns Loading the batteries 1 Caution Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as leakage and bursting Observe the following precautions e Never use new and old
251. poration in the United States and or other countries e With WMAQ Pro sound problems may occur depending on your computer system Note that WMAS9 Pro 96 kHz sources will be downsampled to 48 kHz En 03 Connecting your equipment Connecting analog audio sources This amplifier features five stereo audio only inputs One of these inputs have corresponding outputs for use with audio recorders One of the audio inputs PHONO is a dedicated turntable input which should not be used for any other type of component This input also has a grounding terminal that most turntables require SC LX90 P P Y AUDIO I ea cut R B ASSIGN S400 400 NA NA NEA INE NA NG a A BD Oo ee Gma CaA 4D CA eA BES 2 BD i NE VIDEO AMI 1 i KO DVR VCR 1 j NE on sg 2NI S2 Turntable C ocon Tape deck etc 1 Connect the analog audio outputs of the source 2 Turntables only Connect the stereo audio outputs to component to one of the AUDIO inputs the PHONO inputs Connect using a stereo RCA phono jack audio cable e f yourturntable has a grounding wire secure it to the e If you re connecting a tape deck MD recorder etc ground terminal on this amplifier connect the analog audio outputs RECSEL OUT to e f your turntable has line level outputs i e it has a the analog audio inputs on the recorder built in phono pre amp connect it to the CD inputs instead
252. position of the selected speaker to fine adjust Watch the screen when doing so and fine adjust the positions of the speakers so that the gauge reading is maximum Also the channel serving as the standard differs according to the channel being adjusted Do not move the speaker serving as the standard channel The maximum gauge reading is 10 0 If the reading stays under 10 0 adjust the speaker for the maximum value DVD LD 0 0dB 3c Precision Distance Ref Ch L Ch lt m P SST 9 2 Adjust speaker position Finish 3 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu Note Standing Wave e Default setting ON Acoustic standing waves occur when under certain conditions sound waves from your speaker system resonate mutually with sound waves reflected off the walls in your listening area This can have a negative effect on the overall sound especially at certain lower frequencies Depending on speaker placement your listening position and ultimately the shape of your room it results in an overly resonant boomy sound The Standing Wave Control uses filters to reduce the effect of overly resonant sounds in your listening area During playback of a source you can customize the filters used for Standing Wave Control for each of your MCACC presets 1 Select Standing Wave from the Manual MCACC setup menu 55 0dB DVD LD 55 0dB 3d Sta
253. public the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms En Additional information To do so attach the following notices to the program It is safest to attach them to the start of each source Tile to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found lt one line to give the program s name and an idea of what it does gt Copyright C yyyy name of author This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 of the License or at your option any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail If the program is interactive make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode Gnomovision version 69 Copyright C year name of author Gnomovisio
254. put Setup you won t be able to select this setting The System Setup menu 06 1 Select THX Audio Setting from the Manual SP Setup menu 55 0dB DVD LD 6 Manual SP Setup a Speaker Setting b Channel Level c Speaker Distance d X Curve Return 2 Select either ON or OFF for THX Loudness Plus setting DVD LD 55 0dB 6e THX Audio Setting Loudness Plus lt gt THX Ultra2 SW YES Boundary Gain Compensation OFF SB SP Position 0 0 3 m a E SBL SBR 4 Finish 3 Specify whether your subwoofer is THX Ultra2 certified or not DVD LD 55 0dB 6e THX Audio Setting Loudness Plus ON THX Ultra2 SW RGF Boundary Gain Compensation OFF SB SP Position 0 0 3 m E E SBL SBR Finish If your subwoofer isn t THX Ultra2 certified but you still want to switch boudary gain compensation on select YES here but the effect might not work properly 4 Select either ON or OFF for Boundary Gain Compensation setting DVD LD 6e THX Audio Setting Loudness Plus THX Ultra2 SW Boundary Gain Compensation SB SP Position 0 0 3 m E E SBL SBR Finish 5 Specify the distance of your surround back speakers from each other DVD LD 55 0dB 6e THX Audio Setting Loudness Plus ON THX Ultra2 SW YES Boundary Gain Compensation OFF SB SP Position lt I E gt Finish e 0 0 3 m Surround speakers within 30 cm apart best for THX surround sound
255. put source buttons Press to select control of other components see Controlling the rest of your system on page 106 5 Character display LCD This display shows information when transmitting control signals The following commands are shown when you re setting the remote to control other components see Controlling the rest of your system on page 106 SETUP Indicates the setup mode from which you choose the options below PRESET See Se ecting preset codes directly on page 106 LEARNING See Programming signals from other remote contro s on page 106 MULTI OP See Multi Operation and System Off on page 108 SYS OFF See Multi Operation and System Off on page 108 DIRECT F See Direct function on page 108 RENAME See Renaming input source names on page 108 ERASE See Erasing one of the remote control button settings on page 107 RESET See Resetting the remote control presets on page 107 READ ID See Confirming preset codes on page 108 6 TV CONTROL buttons These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV button Thus if you only have one TV to hook up to this system assign it to the TV input source button see page 106 for more on this TV Use to turn on off the power of the TV TV VOL Use to adjust the volume on your TV INPUT Use to select the TV input signal TV CH Use to select channels MUTE Use to mute the sound or cancel the
256. put source with a numbered video input on the plasma television For example assign DVD LD to input 2 if you have connected the your DVD video output to video input 2 on the plasma television e The Monitor Out Connect should be set to the input that you ve used to connect this amplifier to your plasma television DVD LD 9d SR Setup PDP Volume Control Monitor Out Connect lt gt Finish 4 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the Other Setup menu 1 The component video input signal is only output from COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE2 OUT 2 If you selected 7 2ch ZONE 2 in the Speaker output setting on page 43 you won t be able to change the volume level EO Other Settings Select the OSD display s background pattern Display Image The OSD display s background color can be selected One of the two patterns below can be selected 1 Select Display Image from the Other Setup menu The OSD background color selection mode is set 55 0dB 55 0dB DVD LD 9g Display Image DVD LD 9 Other Setup a Multi Ch In Setup Display Image AiType gt b ZONE Video Setup c ZONE Audio Setup d SR Setup e HDMI Control Setup f i LINK Check Return 2 Use to select the background color pattern type The type switches between Type 1 and Type 2 e Type 1 Blue background color e Type 2 Black background color 3 When you re finished press RETURN You will return to the
257. r Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng 0 88 with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors EE Additional information En John Bowler Kevin Bracey Sam Bushell Magnus Holmgren Greg Roelofs Tom Tanner libpng versions 0 5 May 1995 through 0 88 January 1996 are Copyright c 1995 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat Group 42 INC For the purposes of this copyright and license Contributing Authors is defined as the following set of individuals Andreas Dilger Dave Martindale Guy Eric Schalnat Paul Schmidt Tim Wegner The PNG Reference Library is supplied AS IS The Contributing Authors and Group 42 Inc disclaim all warranties expressed or implied including without limitation the warranties of merchantability and of fitness for any purpose The Contributing Authors and Group 42 Inc assume no liability for direct indirect incidental special exemplary or consequential damages which may result from the use of the PNG Reference Library even if advised of the possibility of such damage Permission is hereby granted to use copy modify and distribute this Source code or portions hereof for any purpose without fee Subject to the following restrictions 1 The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented 2 Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source 3 This Copyright notice ma
258. r Thumbnail List Press ADV SURR Yellow then select Change view from the Tool Menu to choose from the screen display options Add to My Playlist Thumbnail Thunbnail List 4 Using the All Photos Tool Menu List screen All Photos Press ADV SURR Yellow on the remote control to access the pop up Tool Menu Various play and display modes can be selected from the Tool Menu The selectable menu items differ depending on the submenu see the table below Menu items Update to Latest Information Delete Server USB Devices List Consecutive Playback Detailed Display Sort Search Function Updates the server connection status Deletes the server that are dimmed on the list Moves to the USB Devices List screen Continuously plays video content starting from the selected item Displays the detailed information on the selected content Sorts items in Folder or Contents List Searches the desired items in Folder or Contents List by word Screen on which Tool Menu is available Server List connected not connected Server List server not connected Folder Contents List USB Contents List USB Folder Contents List Contents List Folder Contents List Contents List Folder Contents List Contents List Media Navigator Folder Contents List Contents List Menu items Function Slide Show Used to set up a slide Setup show on the Photo Player A
259. r amps or an AV converter such as an HDMI switch can cause operational errors e Only connect components you intend to use as a source to the HDMI input of this amplifier Interrupting a direct connection with other amps or an AV converter Such as an HDMI switch can cause operational errors En Other Settings Chapter 10 Other Settings The Input Setup menu You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu if you didn t hook up your digital equipment according to the default settings see nput function default and possible settings on page 95 In this case you need to tell the amplifier what equipment is hooked up to which terminal so the buttons on the remote control correspond to the components you ve connected AV AMPLIFIER w SOURCE AMP 1 Switch on the amplifier and your TV Use the AV AMPLIFIERO button to switch on 2 Set the operation selector switch to AMP then press the SETUP button An on screen display OSD appears on your TV Use the t lt e buttons and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to confirm and exit the current menu 3 Select Input Setup from the System Setup menu DVD LD 7 Input Setup Input Digital In 2 Output Setup 3 Manual MCACC 4 FULL BAND PHASE CTRL 5 Data Management HDMI Input Component In Comp S Video In Input i LINK In DV S969AVi RF Input v Next Finish 6 Manual SP Setup 8
260. r can be placed on the floor Ideally the other speakers should be at about ear level when you re listening to them Putting the speakers on the floor except the subwoofer or mounting them very high on a wall is not recommended e For the best stereo effect place the front speakers 2m to 3m apart at equal distance from the TV When placing speakers near the TV we recommend using magnetically shielded speakers to prevent possible interference such as discoloration of the picture when the TV is switched on If you do not have magnetically shielded speakers and notice discoloration of the TV picture move the speakers farther away from the TV If you re using a center speaker place the front speakers at a wider angle If not place them at a narrower angle e Place the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is localized at the TV screen Also make sure the center speaker does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of the front left and right speakers It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening position The angle depends on the size of the room Use less of an angle for bigger rooms Surround and surround back speakers should be positioned 60 cm to 90 cm higher than your ears and titled slight downward Make sure the speakers don t face each other For DVD Audio the speakers should be more directly behind the listener than for home theater playback Try not to place
261. r may have a serious problem Do not try switching the amplifier on Contact a Pioneer then the power automatically authorized independent service company for help switches off The MCACC blinks and the power does not turn on AMP OVERHEAT flashes the e Allow the unit to cool down in a well ventilated place before switching back on power turns off and the power e Wait at least 1 minute then try turning the power on again indicator flashes No sound Symptom Remedy No sound is output when an input Check the volume mute setting oress MUTE and speaker setting press SPEAKERS source is selected e Make sure the correct input source is selected No sound output from the front Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected speakers e Make sure the correct input signal is selected press SIGNAL SEL Note that when PCM is selected you won t be able to hear any other signal format e Check that the source component is connected properly see Connecting your equipment on page 16 e Check that the speakers are connected properly see Connecting the speakers on page 28 No sound from the surround or Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance mode isn t selected select center speakers one of the surround listening modes see Listening in surround sound on page 34 e Check that the surround center speakers are not set to NO see Speaker Setting on page 52 e Check t
262. r sound is interrupted or Verify that the file complies with the supported format bit rate or profile Also check the file for damage distorted Block noise appears Some files that comply with the supported format may not play back or display properly e Check if the device is Mass Storage Class compliant if it is connected properly nothing is damaged power unit mode such as Mass Storage mode and media format etc if it contains the supported files and if the speed of the device is sufficient poor device speed may result in interrupted or delayed display of images due to a bit rate problem When using a digital camera that is not Mass Storage Class compliant insert the Flash Memory card into the multi card reader Home Media Gallery Slide Show Slideshow photo content e Check if the amplifier is placed into the pause or rotation mode If that is the case press gt or ENTER to doesn t start start the slideshow Next picture does not appearin The time needed to display a picture may be longer than the time set to display in Slide Show settings the slideshow Reduce the picture size using a PC and try again e Slide Show only displays the supported files If there is only one supported file that file will remain on the display and not display any other files Additional information iPod messages Symptom Cause Action Error l1 There is a problem with the signal path from the Switch off the amplifier and rec
263. r to the standby mode and then use the supplied iPod control cable to connect your iPod to the iPod terminal on the rear panel of this amplifier Push the connector in until you hear it click home To disconnect squeeze the connector as shown to release the catch then pull out 2 Switch the amplifier on and press the iPod input source button to switch the amplifier to the iPod The front LCD display shows Loading while the amplifier verifies the connection and retrieves data from the iPod Note 1 e This system is compatible with an iPod iPod mini iPod nano and iPod Photo portable device fourth generation and above However compatibility may vary depending on the software version of your iPod Note however that some of the functions may be restricted for some models e iPod nanos of the second generation and before do not output video signals externally so iPod nano images cannot be played on this amplifier e When an iPod or iPod nano of fifth generation or above is connected the audio signals are transferred from the iPod in digital format LPCM allowing playback with higher sound quality e Video contents can be played on this amplifier by connecting an iPod compatible with the Video Browse function 2 e This cable is for use with this unit only Do not use it with other equipment e This product is the Pioneer Control Dock for iPod IDK 80 for use with an iPod equipped with a dock connector port fourth generation and abov
264. rack and the tastes of the individual listener e Advanced Speaker Array ASA ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal surround sound experience When you set up your home theater system using all eight speaker outputs Left Center Right Surround Right Surround Back Right Surround Back Left Surround Left and Subwoofer placing the two Surround Back speakers close together facing the front of the room as shown in the diagram will provide the largest sweet spot If for practical reasons you have to place the Surround Back speakers apart you will need to go THX Audio Set up screen and choose the setting that most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing which will re optimize the surround sound field ASA is used in three new modes THX Ultra2 CINEMA THX Ultra2 MUSIC and THX Ultra2 GAMES e Boundary Gain Compensation Depending on the listener s and the subwoofer s position the listener may experience an excessive bass effect This feature compensates for excessive bass resulting from a boundary gain effect This feature is designed to operate when used with a subwoofer certified to THX Ultra2 specifications e THX Music For the replay of multi channel music the THX MusicMode should be selected In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5 1 encoded music sources such as DTS Dolby Digital and DVD Aud
265. rce and display device using the same type of connection component S Video or composite then start playback again ZONE video convert function e Conversion is not possible when the video input signal is a component signal Either use the composite does not work or S Video terminal or connect to the TV using a component cable e Turn the video convert function off and connect the source component and monitor with the same type of cord The external image is not e The external video will not be displayed properly in the following conditions Press the LCD VIEW button displayed on the LCD screen or to switch to the OSD mode the picture is disturbed With HDMI inputs When the video converter is off When the resolution is set to PURE When no external image is being input When a non compatible signal is being input Settings Symptom Remedy The Auto MCACC Setup e The ambient noise level may be too high Keep the noise level in the room as low as possible see also continually shows an error Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 13 If the noise level cannot be kept low enough you will have to set up the surround sound manually page 52 After using the Auto MCACC e There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air conditioner motor etc Switch off Setup the speaker size setting is all other appliances in the room and use Auto MCACC Setup again incorrect e Depending on a
266. rce component e If the source component has a digital volume control make sure this is not turned down e Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are not selected Select any other input source No sound is output oranoiseis Check that your DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital DTS discs output when Dolby Digital DTS Check the digital output settings of your DVD player Make sure that the DTS signal output is set to On software is played back e If the source component has a digital volume control make sure this is not turned down No sound when using the System If the HDMI input source is selected sound is muted until exiting either menu Setup or Status menu e If sound is muted in the sub zone ZONE 2 it will be restored after exiting the System Setup menu Other audio problems Symptom Remedy A multichannel DVD source e Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are selected see Selecting the multichannel analog inputs appears to be downmixed to 2 on page 60 channels during playback Noise is output when scanning a_ This is not a malfunction of the amplifier The scan function of your player alters the digital information DTS CD making it unreadable resulting in noise being output Lower the volume when scanning When playing a DTS format LD Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL see Choosing the input signal on page 37 there is audible noise on the soundtrack
267. re speaker natural Surround sound For details delay see Adjusting the surround B speaker delay Surr B DELAY on page 101 SACD GAIN Brings out detail in SACDs by maximizing the dynamic range during digital processing HDMI Specifies the routing of the HDMI Surr B AUDIO audio signal out of this amplifier HDMI amp or through to a TV or plasma Audio television When THROUGH is selected no sound is output from this amplifier AUTO This feature automatically corrects DELAY the audio to video delay between Auto delay components connected with an HDMI cable The audio delay time is set depending on the operational status of the display connected with an HDMI cable The video delay time is automatically adjusted according to the audio delay time 9 CENTER Provides a better blend of the front WIDTH speakers by spreading the center Center channel between the front right and Width left soeakers making it sound wider Applicable higher settings or narrower lower onlywhen settings using a center speaker DIMENSION Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from front to back making the sound more distant minus settings or more forward positive settings PANORAMA Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a wraparound effect Option s 0dB 5dB 10d B 15dB 200B OFF 0 msec to 20 msec Default 0 msec OdB 6 dB AM
268. re pointing Distance he distance of all the speakers should be equal Angle The speakers should be placed at the angles shown in Fig 1 and be horizontally symmetrical Orientation The orientation should be horizontally symmetrical In most homes however it is not possible to achieve this environment For the distance on this amplifier it is possible to automatically correct the speaker distance electrically to a precision of 1 cm using the Auto MCACC Setup function page 11 and to adjust precisely using the procedure described at Precision Distance page 45 For the volume and sound quality as well accurate sound field correction using the equalizer and speaker phase characteristic correction using the Full Band Phase Control function page 14 together make it possible to achieve the ideal listening environment Here we consider mainly the two elements of angle and orientation based on the ITU R recommended 5 1 channel layout shown in Fig 1 Fig 1 5 1 channel speaker layout recommended by the ITU R ITU R BS 775 1 K Listening gt position This type of setup is based on the recommendations of the ITU R International Telecommunication Union Radiocommunication Sector an international organization specialized in the field of electric communications Step 1 Speaker layout and distance adjustment Adjust the main speakers to the angles shown in Fig 1 Use speaker stands or the like to make sure the spe
269. recommends About the video converter switching Digital Video Conversion in Setting the The video converter ensures that all video sources are GCC R HORS OT Gee OE output through all of the MONITOR VIDEO OUT jacks The only exception is HDMI since this resolution cannot This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U S patents and other be downsampled you must connect your monitor TV to intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and the amplitier s HDMI video outputs when connecting this other rights owners Use of this copyright protection technology i 1 must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended video source cae as for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise If several video components are assigned to the same authorized by Macrovision Corporation Reverse engineering or input function see The nout Setup menu on page 94 disassembly is prohibited the converter gives priority to HDMI component S Video then composite in that order Terminal for connection Terminal for connection Connecting using HDMI with source device with TV monitor If you have an HDMI or DVI with HDCP equipped gt component you can connect it to this amplifier using a 0 z HDMI IN HDMI OUT commercially available HDMI cable D The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital v
270. reen displays then ENTER Note e Be sure to stop playback when resetting to default 08 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs En Software Update Information on software updates may be posted on the Pioneer website http www pioneer eu Home Media Gallery Version You can confirm the version and copyright information on the Home Media Gallery software Select OK to return to the previous screen ENTER Editing files in My Playlist 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed 2 Select My Playlist then ENTER 3 Select Movie Playlist Music Playlist or Photo Playlist from the Playlist category then ENTER Five playlists are displayed Playlist names can be changed with the Change Name command The order of files in a playlist can be changed using the Move command Files can be deleted from playlists using the Delete from My Playlist command For details refer to the descriptions of the individual commands Change Name 1 Choose the playlist whose name you want to change then press ADV SURR Yellow t 2 Select Change Name from the Tool Menu f 4 then ENTER A dialog screen appears 3 Select Playlist Name f then ENTER The software keyboard appears 4 Select OK on the software keyboard t then ENTER The software keyboard disappears and Playlist Name in the Change Name dialog screen retu
271. remote to work with your TV and other components see Setting the remote to control other components on page 106 for more on this e Some units may take some time to power up in which case multiple operations may not be possible e Power on and off commands only work with components that have a standby mode Controlling the rest of your system Cz Programming a multi operation or a shutdown sequence Set the remote control operation mode selector switch to AMP when you want to program this amplifier s operations to SOURCE when you want to program operations of other components MAIN vod SD EAN gt cD HOME MEDIA cD D e cp 1 While pressing the MULTI OPERATION button press SETUP The remote LCD display shows SETUP 2 Use t to select MULTI OP or SYS OFF from the menu and press ENTER If you selected Multi Operation MULTI OP the LCD on the remote prompts you for an input source button If you selected System Off SYS OFF go to step 4 3 Press the input source button for the component that will start the multi operation then press ENTER For example if you want to start the sequence by switching on your DVD player press DVD 4 Use f to select CODE EDT then press ENTER To erase any previously stored multi operations or shutdown sequences select CODE ERS above 5 Use f toselect acommand in the sequence then press ENTER If this is the first command in the sequence select 1ST COD
272. rent analog source than the one you re recording 1 During recording press the REC SELECT CONTROL button on the front panel until RECOUT shows in the display 2 While RECOUT shows in the display use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source you want to record The default RECOUT SOURCE records the source you re Currently listening to as in Making an audio or a video recording on page 102 e Note that the setting you make here is stored in memory even if you switch off the amplifier so if you want to record a different input source later you must do so with REC SELECT or by selecting RECOUT SOURCE 3 After RECOUT disappears from the display select the input source you want to listen to This will be heard from the main system without affecting your recording 1 e The amplifier s volume Audio parameters the tone controls for example and surround effects have no effect on the recorded signal e Some digital sources are copy protected and can only be recorded in analog e Some video sources are copy protected These cannot be recorded 2 If RECOUT does not appear in the display you may have to switch ZONE 2 off by pressing MULTI ZONE CONTROL ZONE 2 and selecting either ZONE 3 or off See Using the MULTI ZONE controls on page 66 for more on this 3 If RECOUT SOURCE is selected changing the input source likewise changes the input source used for your recording Using other functions Reducing the leve
273. ress toggles the forward speed among x 2 x 4 x 8 x 20 x 50 and x 100 When the end of the content is reached it pauses RETURN Returns to the previous screen List Thumbnail Thumbnail List Content being played does not stop Button s Function gt Plays back the selected content Pauses while in playback and plays while in PAUSE lI Pauses the playback w Stops the Player and does not return to the previous screen Selecting the Stop Music from the Tool Menu also stops the Player gt gt Same as lt lt Same as AUTO DIRECT Sets A B repeat mode Sets the desired point A to Blue start and B to end during playback To cancel the mode press AUTO DIRECT Blue on the remote control STEREO Every press toggles the repeat mode among No F S SURR Red Repeat Repeat Once and Repeat All STANDARD Every press toggles the random mode among Green Random Off and Random On ADV SURR Displays the Tool Menu Even if the Tool Menu is Yellow displayed while content is played back music is kept playing but the time counter and progress bar do not function VOL VOL Adjusts the sound volume MUTE Mutes the sound Note e Files may not be played back properly depending on the content HEVAL GCA Add to My Tool Menu Adds the selected content to My Playlist Playlist List Time Search Tool Menu Plays back the selected content from the time preset on the Music Player Stop Music Tool Me
274. ressing SETUP 06 The System Setup menu En This section describes how to calibrate the frequency phase characteristics of the speakers only Once you have performed calibration with Auto MCACC set as a default setting or with CUSTOM set to ALL the Full Band Phase Control calibration is already done In this case the previous settings are overwritten if you perform calibration again as described here 1 Select FULL BAND PHASE CTRL from the System Setup menu See Making amplifier settings from the System Setup menu on page 40 if you re not already at this screen DVD LD 55 0dB DVD LD 55 0dB 4 FULL BAND PASE CTRL System Setup MENU 1 Auto MCACC 2 Output Setup 3 Manual MCACC 5 Data Management 6 Manual SP Setup 7 Input Setup 8 OSD Language 9 Other Setup b Group Delay View 2 Select an option and press ENTER e Measurement Calibrates and corrects the trequency phase characteristics of each speaker e Group Delay View The original characteristics of group delay of the speakers calibrated and the targeted characteristics can be displayed graphically 3 If you selected Measurement press ENTER DVD LD DVD LD 0 0dB 4a Measurement 4a Measurement Now Analyzing 5 5 i FULL BAND PHASE CTRL Measurement FULL BAND PHASE CTRL Delay Check OK gt Group Delay E ENTER Start s Cancel s Cancel When the Full Band Phase Control measurement is fin
275. riorating the quality of the original sound DTS HD Master Audio is an irreplaceable technology that can reproduce sound faithfully as intended by the creator of music or movies DTS is a registered trademark of DTS Inc and DTS HD Master Audio is a trademark of DTS Inc Windows Media Audio 9 Professional Windows Media Audio 9 Professional WMAQ9 Pro is a discrete surround format developed by Microsoft Corporation Plays ag Windows Media WMAS9 Pro can support up to 5 1 7 1 channel playback with sampling rates up to 24 bit 96 kHz Using the unique WMA compression techniques WMAQ9 Pro can deliver multichannel music and soundtracks over high speed internet networks at low bit rates with minimal audio degradation Playback may be enjoyed with the Windows Media Player 9 Series or above and other third party media players on a personal computer or with an AV amplifier with on board WMAS9 Pro decoding Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Additional information About THX The THX technologies are explained below See www thx com for more detailed information 3 E LTRA 2 PLU URROUND E xN e THX Cinema processing THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by THX Ltd THX grew from George Lucas personal desire to make your experience of the film soundtrack in
276. rn 2 Select an option and press ENTER e Reverb Measurement Use this to measure the reverb characteristics of your room for graphical output using a PC see Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 69 to connect an RS 232C cable before selecting this option e Reverb View You can check the reverb measurements made for specified frequency ranges in each channel 1 If the Reverb View procedure is performed after the Automatically setting up for surround sound WCACC amp Full Band Phase Control on page 11 or Reverb Measurement operation depending on the standing wave control setting differences may appear on the reverb graph With the Auto MCACC function the reverberations are measured with the standing waves controlled so the reverb characteristics graph shows the characteristics with the effect of the standing waves eliminated By contrast the Reverb Measurement function measures the reverberations without controlling the standing waves so the graph indicates the reverb characteristics including the effect of the standing waves If you wish to check the reverb characteristics of the room itself with the standing waves as such we recommend using the Reverb Measurement function The System Setup menu e Advanced EQ Setup Use this to select the time period that will be used for frequency adjustment and calibration based on the reverb measurement of your listening area Note that customizing sys
277. rns 5 Select OK when the new name is entered then ENTER The editing finishes and Change Name dialog screen disappears The new Playlist displays Soft Keyboard Playlist Name az Bb cae fl a h oaee The on screen keyboard Software Keyboard is displayed only when you select Search or Change Name Move You can change the listing order of the content registered in My Playlist 1 Choose the playlist for which you want to change the order of the contents then ENTER 2 Press ADV SURR Yellow 3 Select Move from the Tool Menu then ENTER The content selected is placed in a yellow box Source Selection mode 4 Select the desired content then ENTER The selected content is highlighted in the yellow box A specific icon appears on the left Destination Selection mode 5 Press f to move the content up or down then ENTER The highlight in the yellow box disappears and the specific icon returns to the original one Repeat steps 2 and 3 to move another content 6 Press RETURN A Playlist dialog screen appears 7 Select OK then ENTER The dialog screen disappears and moving content finishes To cancel select Cancel then ENTER Delete from My Playlist 1 Choose the playlist from which you want to delete contents then ENTER 2 Choose the contents you want to delete then press ADV SURR Yellow t 3 Select
278. rotates 90 180 270 and Rotate Off The Photo Player goes into PAUSE the slideshow is in Stop mode 5 Press ENTER again to resume the slideshow The selected rotation mode is only effective for the image being displayed The default setting Rotate Off returns when you move and display content on a different screen Repeating the slideshow 1 While playing a slideshow press STEREO F S SURR Red to select Repeat All The slideshow being played is repeated 2 Press STEREO F S SURR Red again to cancel the repeat mode Repeat Off is selected After playing the currently selected slideshow the Player Stops Playing the slideshow at random 1 While playing a slideshow press STANDARD Green to select Random On Random playback starts 2 Press STANDARD Green again to cancel the random mode Random Off is selected Other useful functions Search You can search the desired items contained in the Folder or Contents List by word Searched results are displayed on the screen 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed 2 Select the desired folder and or content in the Media Navigator then ENTER 3 Press ADV SURR Yellow then select Search from the Tool Menu then ENTER A Search dialog screen appears 08 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs En 4 Select the Contains the following box in Set the search condition
279. rough your TV not from this amplifier 6 e This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before AUTO recognizes the PCM signal on a CD for instance e When PCM is selected noise may be output during playback of non PCM sources Please select another input signal if this is a problem 05 Listening to your system En 1 Set the operation selector switch to AMP 2 Press SBch repeatedly to cycle the surround back channel options Each press cycles through the options as follows e SBch ON 6 1 or 7 1 decoding is always used for example a surround back channel will be generated for 5 1 encoded material e SBch AUTO Automatically switches to 6 1 or 7 1 decoding for 6 1 encoded sources for example Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES e SBch OFF No sound is output from the surround back speakers Using the Virtual Surround Back mode When you re not using surround back speakers selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual Surround back channel through your surround speakers You can choose to listen to sources with no surround back channel information or if the material sounds better in the format for example 5 1 for which it was originally encoded you can have the amplifier only apply this effect to 6 1 encoded sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES The table indicates when you will hear the virtual Surround back channel Virtual Surround back channel is active e Press SBch repeat
280. rs themselves Caution e These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage To prevent the risk of electric shock when connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables disconnect the power cord before touching any uninsulated parts e Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel it may cause the power to cut off as a Safety measure Bare wire connections Make sure that the speaker cable you re going to use is properly prepared with about 10 mm of insulator stripped from each wire and the exposed wire strands twisted together fig A To connect a terminal unscrew the terminal a few turns until there is enough space to insert the exposed wire fig B Once the wire is in position tighten the terminal until the wire is firmly clamped fig C fig A fig B gt i A Important e Please refer to the manual that came with your speakers for details on how to connect the other end of the speaker cables to your speakers e f you are using a THX certified subwoofer use the THX INPUT jack on the subwoofer if your subwoofer has one or switch the filter position to THX on your subwoofer Placing the speakers Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect on the quality of the sound The following guidelines should help you to get the best sound from your system e The subwoofe
281. s launched available servers are automatically searched and connected To switch between connected servers choose server to another one select Select Server from the Tool Menu e f a previously connected server can not be found or if the server is in the sleep mode the server name is dimmed grayed out e You cannot select a server unless that media server has been set up Resetting to default You can reset the setups you have entered within the Home Media Gallery function to default see Default Settings on page 85 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed 2 Select Setup then ENTER 3 Select Default Settings then ENTER 4 Select Reset then ENTER A restart dialog screen appears 5 Press ENTER on the dialog screen The setup finishes The system restarts then the Home Media Gallery screen returns Other convenient features Screen saver During navigation the screen saver launches automatically if no activity is sensed within five minutes e No screen saver is available while a movie or slideshow is played e Pressing any key cancels screen saver When canceled with a USB device being connected connecting operation resumes Software Update Information on software updates may be posted on the Pioneer website http www pioneer eu Confirming the existing Home Media Gallery version Be sure to check the version of the software you ar
282. s settings for each type of content e ASA Description ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal surround sound experience When you set up your home theater system using all eight speaker outputs Left Center Right Surround Right Surround Back Right Surround Back Left Surround Left and Subwoofer be sure to go to the THX Audio Set up screen and choose the setting that most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing which will re optimize the surround sound field ASA is used in three modes THX Ultra2 Cinema THX Ultra2 Music and THX Ultra2 Games e THX Ultra2 Cinema THX Ultra2 Cinema mode plays 5 1 movies using all 8 speakers giving you the best possible movie watching experience In this mode ASA processing blends the side surround speakers and back surround speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient and directional surround sounds DTS ES Matrix and 6 1 Discrete and Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected in Ultra2 Cinema mode if the appropriate flag has been encoded Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital flag that allows automatic switching If you know that the movie that you are watching is encoded in Surround EX you can manually select the THX Surround EX playback mode otherwise THX Ultra2 Cinema mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum replay
283. s 480p 576p according to the resolution of your monitor and the images you wish to 20p watch When AUTO is selected the 1080 resolution is automatically selected 7080 depending on the capability of the p display connected to this amplifier ASPECT Specifies the aspect ratio when THROUGH analog video input signals are none output from all of the MONITOR OUT NORMAL terminals Make your desired settings while checking each setting ZOOM on your display if the image doesn t match your monitor type cropping or black bands appear 4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu a When set to a resolution with which the TV monitor is not compatible no picture is output Also in some cases no picture will be output due to copyright protection signals In this case change the setting e When AUTO is selected the resolution is selected automatically according to the capacity of the TV monitor connected by HDMI When PURE is selected the signals are output with the same resolution as when input At this time video signals are only output from the same type of terminals to which they were input e This setting is valid for HDMI and component outputs 1 In the cases described below Surr B DELAY cannot be selected and the effect is turned off even if a value is set When the Output Setup is set to anything other than Normal When surround B Surr B is set to NO at the speaker settings When the speaker
284. s are connected to this amplifier the test tone is output repeatedly Press RETURN to cancel the test tone 6 The EQ Pro amp S Wave measurement is also taken when ALL is selected See Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 47 for more on this e Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the respective MCACC preset For details see Setting the Audio options on page 99 e The FULL BAND PHASE CTRL measurement is also taken when ALL is selected See Fu Band Phase Control on page 49 7 The Keep SP System option allows you to calibrate your system while leaving your current speaker setting page 52 unchanged 8 If you selected ALL as your Custom Menu you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the ALL CH ADJUST and FRONT ALIGN settings 9 Switch the Multi Point setting NO if you only use one listening position 06 The System Setup menu En 3 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the front panel Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone Ifyou have a tripod use itto place the microphone so that it s about ear level at your normal listening position Otherwise place the microphone at ear level using a table or a chair 4 Follow the instructions on screen e Make sure the microphone is connected e f you re using a subwoofer it is automatically detected every time you swi
285. say a work containing the Program or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term moditication Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running the Program is not restricted and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program independent of having been made by running the Program Whether that is true depends on what the Program does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions
286. se terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this tree software If the software is modified by someone else and passed on we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses in effect making the program proprietary To prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow GNU General Public License TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License The Program below refers to any such program or work and a work based on the Program means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law that is to
287. select Repeat All All titles in the folder or Playlist are played repeatedly 2 Press STEREO F S SURR Red again to cancel the repeat mode Repeat Once is selected The title being played is repeated 3 Press STEREO F S SURR Red once more to cancel the repeat mode Repeat Off is selected After playing the currently selected title the Player stops Random Mode 1 While playing content in the Playlist press STANDARD Green to select Random On Random Repeat playback starts 2 Press STANDARD Green again to cancel the random mode Random Off is selected Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs CH Enjoying photo files You can display the menu as a List Thumbnail or Thumbnail List screen Press ADV SURR Yellow then select an option under Change view on the Tool Menu You can also navigate through the subsequent or preceding menu levels in the server or USB device by pressing T or ENTER When you select photo content from the server menu on the Media Navigator screen the Photo Player automatically launches The selected content is displayed in full screen by pressing ENTER Select a category folder or device to access the submenu containing the required file or content Pressing ENTER again allows a slideshow to begin After a slideshow launches pressing ENTER toggles between PLAY and PAUSE Instead of pressing ENTER twice you can press gt to start the slideshow immediately T
288. shed press RETURN You will return to the Data Management setup menu Renaming MCACC presets If you have several different MCACC presets that you re using you may want to rename them for easier identification 1 Select Memory Rename from the Data Management setup menu DVD LD 55 0dB DVD LD 55 0dB 5 Data Management 5b Memory Rename MCACC Position Rename a MCACC Data Check c MCACC Memory Copy d MCACC Memory Clear e Output PC M1 lt L M6 MEMORY 6 O Return Finish 2 Select the MCACC preset you want to rename then select an appropriate preset name Use f to select the preset then to select a preset name 3 Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary then press RETURN when you re finished You will return to the Data Management setup menu Note Copying MCACC preset data If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration EQ see Manual MCACTC setup on page 44 we recommend copying your current settings to an unused MCACC preset Instead of just a flat EQ curve this will give you a reference point from which to start 1 Select MCACC Memory Copy from the Data Management setup menu DVD LD 55 0dB DVD LD 55 0dB 5 Data Management 5c MCACC Memory Copy a MCACC Data Check All Data gt b Memory Rename c MCACC Memory Cop M1 MEMORY 1 d MCACC Memory Clear v e Output PC M2 MEMORY 2 Start Copy Cancel O Return Cancel 2 Select the
289. should select differs according to the selected speaker layout usage method for example if you are planning to make bi amp connections to set up another speaker system etc For details see Se ecting the speaker layout usage pattern on page 9 and Speaker output setting on page 43 e f you have THxX certified speakers select CUSTOM and choose YES for the THX Speaker setting 3 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions Simply choose an unused preset for now you can rename it later in Data Management on page 50 4 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to SYMMETRY Select CUSTOM to save other correction curves such as ALL CH ADJUST and FRONT ALIGN See Automatic MCACC Expert on page 40 for more on this 5 Do not adjust the volume during the test tones This may result in incorrect speaker settings Simple Home Theater Guide Ce If you see an error message ERR in the right side column or the speaker configuration displayed isn t correct there may be a problem with the speaker connection If selecting RETRY doesn t work turn off the power and check the speaker connections If there doesn t seem to be a problem you can simply use to select the speaker and to change the setting and number for surround back and continue 6 Make sure OK is selected then press ENTER A progress report is displayed on screen while the a
290. sing S Video if your source has also been connected using S Video For more information about video connections see Connecting a DVD HDD recorder VCR and other video sources on page 23 cD amp o o an oD a c HOME MEDIA cD De cp INPUT SELECT ES G9 SOURCE TV AMP SIGNAL SEL 1 Select the source you want to record Use the input source buttons or INPUT SELECT e f necessary set the operation selector switch to AMP then press SIGNAL SEL to select the input signal corresponding to the source component see Choosing the input signal on page 37 for more on this 2 Prepare the source you want to record Tune to the radio station load the CD video DVD etc 3 Prepare the recorder Insert a blank tape MD video etc into the recording device and set the recording levels Note Refer to the instructions that came with the recorder if you are unsure how to do this Most video recorders set the audio recording level automatically check the component s instruction manual if you re unsure 4 Start recording then start playback of the source component F tip e f you have a digital recorder connected to the ZONE3 SOURCE OUT digital output and ZONE 3 is switched on see Using the MULTI ZONE controls on page 66 you can also select a different input source for this output while ZONE 3 shows in the display Playing a different source when recording Using this amplifier it s possible to listen to a diffe
291. sorting you can select content to play To return to the sort screen press RETURN during playback 6 Press RETURN to cancel the sort mode Note e The Select a sorting order screen can be displayed while navigating through the music categories Adding files to My Playlist The Home Media Gallery function provides My Playlist a self contained play list that allows you to bookmark your favorite movie music and photo files from the network You can register edit and sort up to 100 files in each Playlist List 1 Press HOME MEDIA GALLERY The Home Media Gallery screen is displayed 2 Select Media Navigator then ENTER 3 Select the desired music content to add to My Playlist then ENTER 4 Press ADV SURR Yellow then select Add to My Playlist from the Tool Menu t then ENTER A dialog screen appears Playlist Selection Selecta Playlist to register Playlist1 Playlist2 Playlist3 Playlist4 Playlist5 5 Select the Playlist to which you want to add the contents then ENTER A check mark is provided in the box at the selected Playlist List Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs CH 6 Select OK on the Playlist Selection dialog screen The selected content is added to the Playlist Note e When giving a slideshow of photo content you can use Music Playlist as for background music 2 Setup The Setup is used for Network Setup Auto Connection Setup De
292. specified on your warranty card Please make sure your system meets the following requirements e Operating system must be Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or Windows 2000 e CPU must be at least Pentium 3 300 MHz or AMD K6 300 MHz or equivalent with at least 128 MB of memory and your monitor must be able to display a minimum resolution of 800x600 e AnRS 232C port connector is necessary for graphical output Refer to the operating instructions and or the PC manufacturer for more information on making the proper port settings e System must have internet access e Connect your computer to the RS 232C jack on the rear panel of the amplifier Make sure that the amplifier and all connected components are switched off and disconnected from the power outlet when you do this 1 Make sure that you do this before continuing to the Reverb Measurement option in Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 48 measurement data is cleared if you switch off the power En Other connections Use acommercially available cable to connect the RS 232C jack on your computer to the 9 pin RS 232C jack on this amplifier See the documentation provided with the Advanced MCACC application for more information RS 232C O000 OO000O0 Personal computer Advanced MCACC output using your PC Before continuing make sure you have compl
293. system A B is set to anything other than A B ON or OFF When using headphones When in the pure direct mode When the audio adjustment function s HDMI audio output is set to THROUGH 2 Adjustments can be performed while watching the actual screen by pressing ENTER after selecting the setting item This may not be possible for some video signals 3 All of the setting items can be set for each input source e Setting items other than VIDEO CONV can only be selected when VIDEO CONV is set to ON ED Using other functions En Making an audio or a video recording You can make an audio or a video recording from an audio or video source connected to the amplifier such as a CD player or TV To use this feature you must set ZONE 3 RECSEL Setting to RECSEL and MULTI ZONE CONTROL to RECOUT SOURCE in the ZONE Audio Setup For details see ZONE Audio Setup on page 97 Keep in mind you can t make a digital recording from an analog source or vice versa So make sure the components you are recording to from are hooked up in the same way see Connecting your equipment on page 16 for more on connections Since the video converter is not available when making recordings from the video OUT jacks make sure to use the same type of video cable for connecting your recorder as you used to connect your video source the one you want to record to this amplifier For example you must connect your recorder u
294. t but changing it is not allowed This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License version 2 hence the version number 2 1 Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This license the Lesser General Public License applies to some specially designated software packages typically libraries of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it You can use it too but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case based on the explanations below When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom of use not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs and that you are informed that you can do these things EE Additional information En To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to s
295. t functions switch on the trigger using the 7he nput Setup menu on page 94 Note that this will only work with components that have a standby mode gt A et 5 2 ng OCO DC OUT 12V TOTAL 250 mA MAX ent a Ej e Connect the 12 V TRIGGER jack of this amplifier to the 12 V trigger of another component Use a cable with a mono mini plug on each end for the connection e The trigger maximum power is DC OUT 12 V 50 mA After you ve specified the input functions that will switch on the trigger you ll be able to switch the component on or off just by pressing the input function s you ve set on page 94 1 Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver remote sensor window e Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology Refer to the manual that came with your component to check for IR compatibility e If using two remote controls at the same time the IR receiver s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor on the front panel e Connections using up to four devices and IR receivers can be made with this amplifier 2 Triggered connections with up to 4 devices compatible with 12 volt triggers can be made with this amplifier En Other connections Using this amplifier with a Pioneer plasma television If you have a Pioneer plasma television you can use an SR cable to
296. t additional notices immediately following this sentence libpng version 1 2 6 September 12 2004 is Copyright c 2004 Glenn Randers Pehrson and is distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng 1 2 5 with the following individual added to the list of Contributing Authors Cosmin Truta libpng versions 1 0 7 July 1 2000 through 1 2 5 October 3 2002 are Copyright c 2000 2002 Glenn Randers Pehrson and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng 1 0 6 with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors Simon Pierre Cadieux Eric S Raymond Gilles Vollant and with the following additions to the disclaimer There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or against infringement There is no warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs This library is provided with all faults and the entire risk of satisfactory quality performance accuracy and effort is with the user libpng versions 0 97 January 1998 through 1 0 6 March 20 2000 are Copyright c 1998 1999 Glenn Randers Pehrson and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng 0 96 with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors Tom Lane Glenn Randers Pehrson Willem van Schaik libpng versions 0 89 June 1996 through 0 96 May 1997 are Copyright c 1996 1997 Andreas Dilge
297. t appear if playback is paused appear on the STATUS audio e Check the playback especially the digital output settings of the source component input information screen when playing Dolby DTS software When playing a DVD Audio disc This is not a malfunction 96 kHz audio from DVD Audio discs is only output from the analog outputs of the DVD player display shows the DVD player This amplifier cannot show the playback sample rate when using the analog inputs 96 kHz However the amplifier s display does not During playback of a DTS 96 24 Make sure that the amplifier is set to AUTO or DIGITAL see Choosing the input signal on page 37 source the display doesn t show 96 kHz When playing Dolby Digital or e Check that the player is connected using a digital connection DTS sources some input e Make sure that the amplifier is set to AUTO or DIGITAL see Choosing the input signal on page 37 channels do not light correctly e Check that the player isn t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are converted to PCM on the STATUS audio input e Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc the Dolby Digital or DTS is selected information screen OSD does not appear inthe LCD Press the LCD VIEW button on the front panel and change the LCD settings page 103 display When playing certain discs none The disc may not contain 5 1 6 1 channel material Check the disc packaging for more on what audio of the
298. t based on the Library with the Library or with a work based on the Library on a volume of a Storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library To do this you must alter all the notices that refer to this License so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License version 2 instead of to this License If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared then you can specify that version instead if you wish Do not make any other change in these notices Once this change is made in a given copy it is irreversible for that copy so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library EE Additional information En 4 You may copy and distribute the Library or a portion or derivative of it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange If distribution of object code is made by offering a
299. t heed ae ntease ee Installing the amplifier 0 ccc ee ees Loading the DatleneS s i 4i4credievevis t sav ens 02 Simple Home Theater Guide Introduction to home theater ccc eee LIStCHING to Surround SOUNG essa tri drre irera Selecting the speaker layout usage pattern Normal surround connections default setting 5 2 channel Bi amp Connections 0 0c eee 7 2 channel front Bi amp connections 04 7 2 channel Zone 2 connections 0005 7 2 channel speaker B connections 04 Positioning and connecting the speakers Normal surround connections default setting 5 2 channel Bi amp CONNECTIONS saaana 7 2 channel front Bi amp connections 05 7 2 channel Zone 2 connections saaana aaa aaa 7 2 channel speaker B connections 04 Automatically setting up for Surround sound MCACC amp Full Band Phase Control Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup Playing a SoU Oie seseo thier a Enk de OOo tnd Better sound using Phase Control and Full Band Phase Control 5344 sranie etine sean Using Phigse COGIC a 444 o0 uae sete e iw a ee es Using Full Band Phase Control 2 ccc esaaeuaas 03 Connecting your equipment Pee OUI tau tach A oreo Oe dor oe ee wae es When making cable connections 0000 About the video converter cee ee Connecting using HDMI si ei eis cece ise eae enses A OUt AONI ca h naae renr aoe oad aoe Connecting your TV
300. tal contents e 10 channel amplifier multi assign function One of five patterns of the 10 channel amplifier speaker terminals can be selected according to the desired scene e Easy setup using Advanced MCACC The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate surround sound setup which includes the advanced features of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ This innovative technology measures the reverb characteristics of your listening area allowing you to customize your system calibration with the help of a graphical output that can be displayed on screen or using a computer With the additional benefits of numerous MCACC preset memories standing wave control and microphone measurements from a series of reference points your home theater experience can be truly customized for optimal Surround sound e Phase Control The Phase Control feature corrects the phase distortion as well as group delay for LFE Low Frequency Effects audio signals during multichannel playback e Full Band Phase Control The Full Band Phase Control feature analyzes the trequency phase characteristics of the speakers connected and corrects the phase distortion to the flattened frequency phase characteristics This correction minimizes the group delay of the middle and low frequency ranges against the high frequency range and improves the frequency phase characteristics across all ranges Furthermore the enhanced frequency phase characteristics betwee
301. tch on the system Make sure it is on and the volume is turned up e See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 13 for notes regarding high background noise levels and other possible interference 5 Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish outputting test tones A progress report is displayed on screen while the amplifier outputs test tones to determine the speakers present in your setup Try to be as quiet as possible while it s doing this e Do not adjust the volume during the test tones This may result in incorrect speaker settings e With error messages Such as Too much ambient noise or Check Microphone select RETRY after checking for ambient noise see Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 13 and verifying the mic connection If there doesn t seem to be a problem you can simply select GO NEXT and continue 6 If necessary confirm the speaker configuration in the OSD The configuration shown on screen should reflect the actual speakers you Nave Note If no operations are performed for 10 seconds while the speaker configuration check screen is being displayed the Auto MCACC Setup will resume automatically In this case you don t need to select OK and press ENTER in step 7 D D 0 0dB DVD LD VD L 1 Auto MCACC 1 Auto MCACC Now Analyzing 2 10 0 Front Center Environment Check Ambient Noise OK gt Microphone Speaker YES NO YESx2 A oK
302. ted right of use to this product under USA and foreign patent patent pending and other technology or trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation and THX Ltd Neural Surround is a trademark owned by Neural Audio Corporation THX is a trademark of THX Ltd which may be registered in some jurisdictions All rights reserved Additional information About open source related licenses Copyright c 1998 1999 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper Copyright c 2001 2002 2008 2004 2005 2006 Expat maintainers THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS S WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING ROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Portions of this software are copyright c lt year gt The FreeType Project www treetype org All rights reserved please replace lt year gt with the value from the FreeType version you actually use If only executable code is distributed then the accompanying documentation must state that this software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group COPYRIGHT NOTICE DISCLAIMER and LICENSE If you modify libong you may inser
303. tem calibration using this setup will alter the settings you made in Automatically setting up for surround sound MCACC amp Full Band Phase Control on page 11 or Automatic MCACC Expert on page 40 and is not necessary if you re satisfied with these settings 3 If you selected Reverb Measurement select EQ ON or OFF and then START 55 0dB DVD LD 0 0dB 3f1 Reverb Measurement Now Analyzing DVD LD 3f1 Reverb Measurement MCACC M1 MEMORY 1 Reverb Measure with A EQ gt Environment Check Ambient Noise gt Microphone START Speaker Level s Cancel The following options determine how the reverb characteristics of your listening area are displayed in Reverb View and Output PC Data Management e EQ OFF You will see the reverb characteristics of your listening area without the equalization performed by this amplifier before calibration e EQ ON You will see the reverb characteristics of your listening area with the equalization performed by this amplifier after calibration Note that the EQ response may not appear entirely flat due to adjustments necessary for your listening area When the reverb measurementis finished you can select Reverb View to see the results on screen See Professional Calibration EQ graphical output on page 118 for troubleshooting information 4 If you selected Reverb View you can check the reverb characteristics for each channel Press RETURN when yo
304. tening to test tones see Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 47 EQ Professional Calibrate your system based on the direct sound coming from the speakers and make detailed settings according to your room s reverb characteristics see Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 47 Fine Channel Level e Default setting 0 0dB all channels You can achieve better surround sound by properly adjusting the overall balance of your speaker system The following setting can help you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual speaker setup on page 52 1 Select Fine Ch Level from the Manual MCACC setup menu The volume increases to the 0 0 dB reference level DVD LD 3 Manual MCACC a Fine Channel Level b Fine SP Distance 55 0dB DVD LD 20 0dB 3a Fine Channel Level Please wait 20 c Precision Distance d Standing Wave CAUTION e EQ Adjust f EQ Professional Loud test tones will be output Return 4 Cancel The System Setup menu 2 Adjust the level of the left channel This will be the reference speaker level so you may want to keep the level around 0 0dB so that you ll have plenty of room to adjust the other speaker levels DVD LD 0 0dB 3a Fine Channel Level MCACC M1 MEMORY 1 Ble Fo Ref Ch L ETATE gt ENTER Next Cancel e After pressing ENTER test tones will be output 3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels
305. tes bi polar radiating speakers should output at an angle parallel to the listener Sed dal a L C R e Surround Surround SBL AA SBR Surround back e f you have two surround back speakers THX recommends placing them together and the same distance from your listening position for the following THX modes THX Ultra2 CINEMA THX Ultra2 MUSIC and THX Ultra2 GAMES See also 7HX Audio Setting on page 54 to make the settings that will give you the best sound experience when using the Home THX modes page 35 Plugging in the amplifier Only plug in after you have connected all your components to this amplifier including the speakers 1 Plug the supplied power cord into the AC IN socket on the back of the amplifier 2 Plug the other end into a power outlet Caution e Handle the power cord by the plug part Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock Do not place the unit a piece of furniture or other object on the power cord or pinch the cord in any other way Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables The power cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be stepped on A damaged power cord can cause afire or give you an electric shock Check the power cord once in a while If you find it damaged ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company for a replacement
306. th other patterns and the maximum number of channels is 5 2 but this pattern provides the highest sound quality Speakers used Total 5 bi amp compatible speakers 2 front 1 center 2 Surround Applicable listening rooms Suited to all listening rooms Output Setup All Ch Bi Amp 7 2 channel front Bi amp connections Subwoofer E i i T Front Center C Front left L right R LLU Surround back Surround back Surround right SR Surround left SL left SBL right SBR bi amp compatible speakers Features Provides up to 7 2 channel surround playback with high quality sound bi amp from the front and center speakers Speakers used Total 7 2 front bi amp compatible 1 center bi amp compatible 2 surround 2 Surround back Applicable listening rooms Rooms with space to place the surround back speakers behind or above the listening position Output Setup Front Bi Amp 1 If you want to expand the system into a surround playback environment though there are currently only two speakers or if you want to make bi amp connections though you do not have enough speaker cables select the pattern you are thinking of trying For either pattern the optimum playback environment can be achieved using Auto MCACC Setup regardless of the number of speakers 02 Simple Home Theater Guide En 7 2 channel Zone 2 connections Main Zone Zone 2 Subwoofer E ii m Front Center
307. the source and the setting for surround back channel processing see Using surround back channel processing on page 37 for more on this qy SOURCE asap THX 1 Set the operation selector switch to AMP 2 Press THX to select a listening mode With two channel sources press THX repeatedly to select a matrix decoding process for the THX CINEMA mode see Listening in Surround sound on page 34 for an explanation of each process OO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE THX e DO PRO LOGIC THX CINEMA e Neo 6 CINEMA THX OO Pro Logic IIx MUSIC THX Neo 6 MUSIC THX OO Pro Logic IIx GAME THX e THX Ultra2 GAMES With multichannel sources press THX repeatedly to select from e THX Surround EX Allows you to hear 6 1 or 7 1 channel playback with 5 1 channel sources OO Pro Logic IIx MOVIE THX e THX Ultra2 CINEMA Allows you to hear 7 1 channel playback with 5 1 channel sources OO Pro Logic IIx MUSIC THX THX Ultra2 MUSIC This mode is suited not only for sources recorded in Dolby Digital and DTS but also to all multi channel music sources DVD Audio etc THX Ultra2 GAMES This mode is suited to playing the sound of games Note Using the Advanced surround effects The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety of additional surround sound effects Most Advanced Surround modes are designed to be used with film soundtracks but some modes are also suited for music sources Try different settings with various soundtracks
308. the component video signals e f you have more than one i LINK component connected you can assign each one to a different input function in the same way to check your settings after doing so see Checking the i LINK inputs on page 59 2 6 When you re finished select Next to continue to the next screen The second screen of the Input setup has three optional settings e Input Name You can choose to rename the input function for easier identification Select Rename to do so or Default to return to the system default e 12V Trigger 1 to 4 After connecting a component to one of the 12 volt triggers see Switching components on and off using the 12 volt trigger on page 67 select MAIN ZONE 2 ZONE 3 or OFF for the corresponding trigger setting to switch it on automatically along with the main or sub zone specified 1 For high definition video using component video connections or when digital video conversion is switched off in Setting the Video options on page 101 you must connect your TV to this amplifier using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component 2 e If you assign i LINK equipped components to an input for example DVD LD you will be able to select both audio and video signals from i LINK equipped components using the corresponding input source button or the INPUT SELECT button INPUT SELECTOR dial Assigning i LINK sources also allows you to keeps the sound settings
309. the key guide table Mode Green Tool Menu ADV SURR See the key guide table Yellow 08 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs En Note e Some functions may not be supported depending on the server type or version used During playback an error may arise in time related information depending on the content or server software e Some functions may not be supported depending on the content Time Search 1 In playback mode or PAUSE press ADV SURR Yellow then select Time Search from the Tool Menu t then ENTER A Time Search dialog screen appears 2 Select Hour and or Minute for Input Time f then ENTER Enter the desired time using buttons 0 to 9 Time Search Input Time it E vin OK Cancel 3 Press ENTER after the entry is complete 4 Select OK then ENTER The movie begins playing from the time you set To cancel the Time Search select Cancel and press ENTER Note e This function may not be supported depending on the content or server software e An error may arise in time related information depending on the content or server software e Only Cancel can be selected when you have entered a time exceeding the content s time range Slow Playback 1 In playback mode or PAUSE press ADV SURR Yellow then select Slow Playback from the Tool Menu then ENTER 2 Press ENTER Slow playback begins You can change th
310. the speakers calibrated and the corrected characteristics of group delay can be displayed in 3 dimension on your PC see Advanced MCACC output using your PC on page 70 3 The FULL BAND PHASE CTRL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases When headphones are plugged in When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 99 03 Connecting your equipment En Chapter 3 Connecting your equipment This amplifier provides you with many connection possibilities but it doesn t have to be difficult This page explains the kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system Rear panel PassiGnaBle i Mo ouT1 INI INE IN INI Ing HDMI CTRL R3 caaca R4 6a a60 R5 so469f L5 6462 A sta A sa Plt s Ta m E H SEE INSTRUCTION LOW HIGH LOW HIGH VOIR LE MODE FRONT SURROUND CENTER D EMPLOI All ch Bi Amp Rl R Caution e Before making or changing the connections switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet Plugging in should be the final step 1 S 400 i LINK connectors x2 Use to connect other i LINK audio devices for high resolution multichannel digital audio input output See Using the i LINK interface on page 58 2 Optical and coaxial digital audio inputs x10 Use for digital audio sources including DVD players recorders digital satellite rece
311. the stereo playback mode page 36 and the Front Stage Surround Advance mode page 36 AUTO DIRECT Press to select Auto Surround page 34 or Stream Direct page 36 listening THX Press to select a Home THX listening mode page 35 STANDARD Press for Standard decoding and to switch between the various D0 Pro Logic IIx and Neo 6 options page 34 ADV SURR Use to switch between the various surround modes page 35 11 Number buttons and other amplifier component controls Use the number buttons to directly select the tracks ona CD DVD ete ENTER can be used to enter commands for TV or DTV After set the remote control operation switch to AMP SIGNAL SEL Use to select an input signal page 37 SLEEP Use to put the amplifier in sleep mode and select the amount of time before sleep page 103 DIMMER Dims or brightens the display page 103 SR Switches the SR mode on off page 69 SBch Use to select the surround irtual back channel mode page 37 PHASE Press to switch on off Phase Control or Full Band Phase Control page 14 A ATT Attenuates lowers the level of an analog input signal to prevent distortion page 103 GENRE Automatically selects the most appropriate Advanced Surround mode for the genre of the source currently being played back this feature is available only when a Pioneer DVD recorder supporting HDMI Control is connected to this amplifier via HDMI page
312. tically assigned The Home Media Gallery supports Auto IP and DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol If the system failed to acquire the IP Address or if you want to obtain different addresses select No then enter IP Address and Subnet mask Use the 0 to 9 and E buttons to enter an address then press ENTER You do not need to enter Default Gateway and DNS Server 6 Select OK then ENTER The Reset dialog appears on screen 7 Select OK and press ENTER The home network module restarts A message Setting up Home Media Gallery Please wait until initialized appears on screen When the initialization is finished setting values become effective and the top menu of the Home Media Gallery returns Note Note e For information on DHCP refer to network device s operating instructions e You may need to contact your service provider or network administrator when manually entering an IP Address e Some media servers block or are programmed to block access to client servers When connecting this amplifier check the media server for client server access rights Connecting a USB device You can also enjoy content stored on memory cards by connecting a USB device to this amplifier When you insert a USB flash drive or multi card reader into the USB port the root directory or the Device List screen appears In addition you can connect your digital camera directly to this amplifier using a USB connect
313. to control this amplifier using the remote you will have to point it at the plasma television s remote sensor after making this connection 2 When German Russian or Chinese is selected the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input OSD screen is in English En Other Settings The Other Setup menu The Other Setup menu is where you can make customized settings to reflect how you are using the amplifier AV AMPLIFIER w SOURCE AMP 1 Switch on the amplifier and your TV Use the AV AMPLIFIERO button to switch on 2 Set the operation selector switch to AMP then press the SETUP button An on screen display OSD appears on your TV Use the T e buttons and ENTER to navigate through the screens and select menu items Press RETURN to confirm and exit the current menu 3 Select Other Setup then press ENTER 55 0dB DVD LD 9 Other Setup b ZONE Video Setup c ZONE Audio Setup d SR Setup e HDMI Control Setup f i LINK Check g Display Image 4 FULL BAND PHASE CTRL 5 Data Management 6 Manual SP Setup 7 Input Setu 8 OSD Language S Exit Return 4 Select the setting you want to adjust If you are doing this for the first time you may want to adjust these settings in order e Multi Ch In Setup Specifies the optional settings fora multi channel input e ZONE Video Setup Set the MULTI ZONE video conversion function see ZONE Video Setup below e ZONE Audio Setup Specify your vol
314. to start the corresponding player by pressing ENTER Screen Components Media Navigator B Too Al 6 Thumbnail of the file selected if obtained Name of the server currently selected Current menu level Item being selected highlighted in yellow File number total number of Tiles Number of servers connected N GO uu BP WN Key guide Note e The Media Navigator is not launched depending on the option selected in Auto Connection Setup on page 85 The screen displays after selecting a server in the server list USB Like navigating through the media servers you can select the desired file contained in the device selected on the USB Devices List screen to start the corresponding player by pressing ENTER You can also select the menu displayed on either List Thumbnail or Thumbnail List screen Press ADV SURR Yellow and select Change view from the Tool Menu Note e The USB Devices List screen may not be displayed depending on the option selected in Auto Connection Setup Single Server USB is selected for Auto Connection Setup by default You don t need to select a device in the USB Devices List when you use a single directory device USB flash drive 08 Playback with HOME MEDIA GALLERY inputs My Playlist Each category Movie Music and Photo has five different Playlists in which you can register up to 100 files each The My Playlist option can contain sound and image files selected in the Media
315. to the center of where the front left and right speakers sound projection area converges e F S SURR WIDE Use to provide a surround sound effect to a wider area than FOCUS mode Note FOCUS position Recommended WIDE position Front left speaker Front left speaker Frontright speaker Frontright speaker Using Stream Direct Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the truest possible reproduction of a source All unnecessary signal processing is bypassed and you re left with the pure analog or digital sound source see Stream direct with different input signal formats on page 145 AUTO a 1 While listening to a source press AUTO DIRECT AUTO SURROUND STREAM DIRECT to select the mode you want Check the digital format indicators in the front LCD display to see how the source is being processed e AUTO SURROUND See Auto playback on page 34 e DIRECT Sources are heard according to the settings made in the Surround Setup speaker setting channel level speaker distance acoustic calibration EQ and X curve as well as with dual mono the input attenuator and any sound delay and hi bit hi sampling settings You will hear sources according to the number of channels in the signal PURE DIRECT Analog and PCM sources are heard without any digital processing When the speaker output setting is set to 7 2ch Speaker B no sound is output from the Speaker B in this mode 1 When
316. ts contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The GIFLIB distribution is Copyright c 1997 Eric S Raymond THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright c 1988 1997 Sam Leffler Copyright c 1991 1997 Silicon
317. u re done DVD LD 3f2 Reverb View M1 EQ OFF Ch N gt Fq 125Hz dB 55 0dB This appears according to the setting you chose in Reverb Measurement step 3 above Use the buttons to select the channel and the frequency you want to check Use the buttons to go back and forth between the two Note that the markers on the vertical axis indicate decibels in 2 dB steps Note 5 If Advanced EQ Setup is selected enter the desired time setting for calibration Press to proceed to the next screen and then select START Based on the reverb measurement above you can choose the time period that will be used for the final frequency adjustment and calibration Even though you can make this setting without reverb measurement It is best to use the measurement results as a reference for your time setting For an optimal system calibration based on the direct sound coming from the speakers we recommend using the 30 50ms setting DVD LD 55 00B DVD LD 55 0dB 3f3 Adv EQ Setup 1 2 3f3 Adv EQ Setup 2 2 E Faq 125Hz Tm 30 50ms MCACC M1 MEMORY 1 EQ Type SYMMETRY Stand Wave Multi Point NO lt START gt Cancel ENTER Start Cancel Use the buttons to select the channel frequency and time setting Use the buttons to switch between them You can switch between your connected speakers excluding the subwoofer and display the measurements for the following freque
318. udio Amp DINERON f Digital Video Conversion On Panorama OR Speakers SP A BON Neo 6 Options Center Image o S ee Pome All Inputs Listening Mode 2 ch AUTO SURROUND Speaker System Front SMALL Listening Mode ch AUTO SURROUND Center SMALL Listening Mode HP SEO a pulse See also Setting the Audio options on page 99 for other default DSP Surr B SMALL settings SB SMALLx2 MCACC SW YESX2 Channel level M1 to M6 0 dB Crossover 80 Hz Speaker Distance M1 to M6 3 00 m X Curve OFF Standing Wave Standing Wave On ON THX Audio Setting 0 0 3m M1 to M6 Off LCD VIEW OSD ATT 0 dB DIMMER brightest SWch Wide Trim 0 0 Inputs EQ Data M1 to M6 All channels bands 0 dB See nput function default and possible settings on page 95 EQ Wide Trim M1 to M6 0 0 dB MULTI ZONE Zone 2 Volume Level Variable Zone 2 3 Volume 60 HDMI HDMI output HDMI OUT1 HDMI Control ON SR SR Control On Off OFF SR Volume Control On Off OFF Monitor Out OFF DSP MCACC Position Memory M1 MEMORY 1 Surround back channel Processing ON Phase Control ON Full Band Phase Control OFF Sound Retriever OFF Sound Delay 0 frame Dual Mono CH1 DRC AUTO SACD Gain 0 dB Surr B Delay 0 msec LFE Attenuate 0 dB Auto delay OFF Digital Safety OFF Effect Level ExtendedStereo 90 Other modes 50 gt Controlling the rest of your system En Chapter 12 Controlling the rest of your system Setting the remote to control other com
319. ultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 8 Ifthe distribution and or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either
320. ume setting for a MULTI ZONE setup see ZONE Audio Setup on page 97 e SR Setup Specify how you want to control your Pioneer plasma television see SR Setup for Pioneer plasma televisions on page 97 e HDMI Control Setup Synchronizes this amplifier with your Pioneer component supporting HDMI Control see Setting the HDMI Control mode on page 92 e i LINK Check Check which i LINK equipped components you have connected and which input function they are assigned to see Checking the LLINK inputs on page 59 Display Image Select the OSD display s background pattern see Se ect the OSD display s background pattern Display Image on page 98 5 Make the adjustments necessary for each setting pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen Multi Channel Input Setup You can adjust the level of the subwoofer for a multi channel input Also when the multi channel input is selected as an input source you can display the video images of other input sources In the Multi Channel Input Setup you can assign a video input to the multi channel input 1 Select Multi Ch In Setup from the Other Setup menu 55 0dB DVD LD 9 Other Setup b ZONE Video Setup c ZONE Audio Setup d SR Setup e HDMI Control Setup f i LINK Check g Display Image Return 2 Select the SW Input Gain setting you want e OdB Outputs sound of the subwoofer at the level originally recorded on the sourc
321. until you rename them in Data Management on page 50 4 You may also want to have separate calibration settings for the same listening position depending on how you re using your system The System Setup menu A Important e Make sure the microphone speakers are not moved during the Auto MCACC Setup e Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any existing settings for the MCACC preset you select e The screen saver will automatically appear after three minutes of inactivity Caution e The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are output at high volume 1 Select Auto MCACC from the System Setup menu then press ENTER If the System Setup screen is not displayed refer to Making amplifier settings from the System Setup menu on page 40 DVD LD System Setup MENU 55 0dB DVD LD 1 Auto MCACC Output Setup Normal Output Setup Manual MCACC FULL BAND PHASE CTRL Data Management Manual SP Setup Input Setup OSD Language Other Setup Save SYMMETRY to M1 MEMORY 1 WONDUARWN lt START gt ENTER Start s Cancel 2 Make sure Normal is selected 2 select an MCACC preset then select START For a fully customized Auto MCACC setup select e EQ Type only available when the Custom Menu above is EQ Pro amp S Wave This determines how the frequency balance is adjusted After a single calibration is performed each of the following three correction Curves can be stored s
322. up on page 97 4 5 When you re finished press CTRL again to return to the main zone controls You can also press the ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 button on the 1 Press ZONE2 or ZONE3 to select the desired zone 5 front panel to switch off all output to the sub zone s room The zone turns on and off each time the corresponding button is pressed It is possible to turn both on K Note 1 When you use ZONE 3 you must set ZONE 3 RECSEL Setting in the ZONE Audio Setup menu to ZONE 3 page 97 2 Note that when recording this also selects the RECOUT input source See Making an audio or a video recording on page 102 for more on this 3 If the amplifier is in standby the display is dimmed and ZONE and your selected sub zone s continue to show in the display 4 The volume levels of the main and sub zones are independent 5 e You won t be able to switch the main zone off completely unless you ve switched off the MULTI ZONE control first e If you don t plan to use the MULTI ZONE feature for awhile turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so that this amplifier is in standby Other connections MULTI ZONE remote controls Set the MULTI ZONE operation switch to ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 to operate the corresponding zone The following table shows the possible MULTI ZONE remote controls Button What it does Switches on off power in the currently selected sub zone INPUT Use to select the input source in the currently
323. up to 3 Mbps on HD DVD and 1 7 Mbps on Blu ray Disc and it outputs Dolby Digital bitstreams for playback on existing Dolby Digital systems Dolby Digital Plus can accurately reproduce the sound originally intended by directors and producers It also features multi channel sound with discrete channel output interactive mixing and streaming capability in advanced systems Supported by High Definition Media Interface HDMI a single cable digital connection is possible for high definition audio and video Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is the next generation lossless encoding technology developed for high definition optical discs in the upcoming era Dolby TrueHD delivers tantalizing sound that is bit for bit identical to the studio master unlocking the true high definition entertainment experience on high definition optical discs in the next generation When coupled with high definition video Dolby TrueHD offers an unprecedented home theater experience with stunning sound and high definition picture It supports bit rates of up to 18 Mbps and records up to 8 full range channels individually with 24 bit 96 kHz audio It also features extensive metadata including dialogue normalization and dynamic range control Supported by High Definition Media Interface HDMI a single cable digital connection is possible for high definition audio and video HD DVD and Blu ray Disc standards currently limit their maximum number of audio channels to
324. urrender these rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of the library whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code If you link other code with the library you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with a two step method 1 we copyright the library and 2 we offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the library To protect each distributor we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library Also if the library is modified by someone else and passed on the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version so that the original author s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others Finally software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder Therefore we insist that any patent license obtained for a versi
325. usage pattern on page 9 and right speakers only are necessary Note that your You can use speakers with a nominal impedance main surround speakers should always be connected as between 6 Q and 16 Q or between 4 Q and 16 Q for the a pair but you can connect just one surround back R1 L1 terminals Front Front right Center left O Subwoofer 2 Subwoofer 1 LINE LEVEL INPUT Pr Pa YES nec se p nec stl nE DVD LD REC BD SEL O T O Moir s CD R nE IDEO To cane H EVRAKI IN 2 A a S n ka r 4 a MONTOR om IN L 2 es aD PHONO TV TRIGGER 1 2 3 4 DC OUT 12V TOTAL 250 mA MAX L4 so460 L3 60460 L2 s2469 LI 4o60 WIGS SURROUND ACK R362460 R4 60460 DG CENTER SC LX90 Oo So P Surround Surround Surround Surround right A right B left B left A Surround Surround back right back left PA Note 1 e When using one subwoofer connect it to the SUBWOOFER 1 terminal e When using only one surround back speaker connect it to the L4 Single terminals e When only two surround speakers are connected connect them to the L2 SL A and R2 SR A terminals 03 Connecting your equipment En Connecting the speakers Each speaker connection on the amplifier comprises a positive and negative terminal Make sure to match these up with the terminals on the speake
326. ut usage pattern selected Use commercially available speaker cords to make the connections Bare wire connections Make sure that the speaker cable you re going to use is properly prepared with about 10 mm of insulator stripped from each wire and the exposed wire strands twisted together fig A To connect a terminal unscrew the terminal a few turns until there is enough space to insert the exposed wire fig B Once the wire is in position tighten the terminal until the wire is firmly clamped fig C fig A fig B fig C ie A Important e Before connecting the equipment make sure that the power is turned off and the power cords are unplugged from the power outlets 1 e You can use speakers with a nominal impedance between 6 Q and 16 Q or between 4 Q and 16 Q for the R1 L1 terminals e Each speaker connection on the amplifier comprises a positive and negative terminal Make sure to match these up with the terminals on the speakers themselves e Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure Simple Home Theater Guide Normal surround connections default setting When using only one surround back speaker connect it to the L4 Single terminals When only two surround speakers are connected connect the
327. want to dispose this product do not mix it with general household waste There is a separate collection system for used electronic products in accordance with legislation that requires proper treatment recovery and recycling Private households in the member states of the EU in Switzerland and Norway may return their used electronic products free of charge to designated collection facilities or to a retailer if you purchase a similar new one For countries not mentioned above please contact your local authorities for the correct method of disposal By doing so you will ensure that your disposed product undergoes the necessary treatment recovery and recycling and thus prevent potential negative effects on the environment and human health K058_A_En Changing the TV format setting If the System Setup menu is not displayed correctly it may be that the TV system is set incorrectly for your country or region 1 With the amplifier in standby press STANDBY ON while holding down the SETUP button 2 Select PAL NTSC using t then select PAL or NTSC using The display shows the new setting PAL or NTSC En Thank you for buying this Pioneer product Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly After you have finished reading the instructions put them away in a sate place for future reference Contents 01 Before you start Checking what S ith BOX cade
328. wer for any home use but it s possible to add additional amplifiers to every channel of your system using the pre outs Make the connections shown below to add amplifiers to power your speakers e Before making or changing the connections switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet S C z LX9 0 INPUT O P OW e red 7 2 subwoofer 2 O Powered Subwoofer 1 or Front channel amplifier Center channel amplifier mono Surround channel amplifier ANALOG INPUT L R i i Ea Ee Surround back channel amplifier e The sound from the PREOUT SURROUND BACK and PREOUT EXTRA terminals will depend on how you configured the Speaker output setting on page 43 Pay attention to this when connecting another power amplifier etc Speaker Sound output from Sound output from the PREOUT EXTRA terminals output setting the PREOUT SURROUND BACK terminals Normal Surround back channel Surround B channel sound sound All CH Bi Amp None None Front Bi Amp Surround back channel None sound 7 2ch ZONE 2 Surround back channel None sound 7 2ch Surround back channel Down mixed 2 channel Speaker B sound sound e You can use the additional amplifier on the surround back channel pre outs for a single speaker as well In this case plug the amplifier into the left L Single terminal only e To hear sound only from the pre outs switch the speaker system to OFF or simply discon
329. who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 5 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Program or any work based on the Program you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it 6 Each time you redistribute the Program or any work based on the Program the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License EE Additional information 7 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy sim
330. width Digital Content Protection HDCP as well as Digital Visual Interface DVI in one specification HDCP is used to protect digital content transmitted and received by DVI compliant displays HDMI has the capability to support standard enhanced or high definition video plus standard to multi channel surround sound audio HDMI features include uncompressed digital video one connector instead of several cables and connectors and communication between the AV source and AV devices such as DIVs HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC 03 Connecting your equipment En Connecting your TV and DVD player SC LX90 S400 5400 For LD Gz Se Gs ET lt z kad pam Seppa a oS SS 455 Sms e COAXIAL OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT DVD player The diagram shows a basic setup of this amplifier together with a TV and DVD player with S Video or composite video connections Different TVs and DVD players may offer alternative connections See also Using the component video jacks on page 24 if your TV and or DVD player has component video inputs outputs If your DVD player offers multichannel analog audio outputs see Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 60 1 Connect the MONITOR OUT video jack to a video input on your TV Use a standard RCA phono jack video cable to connect to the comp
331. wo primary sub zone setups possible with this system Choose whichever works best for you Note Main zone MULTI ZONE listening options The following table shows the signals that can be output to ZONE 2 and ZONE 32 Sub Zone Input sources available ZONE2 Analog audio signals AUDIO ZONE2 OUT and digital audio signal COAXIAL ZONE2 OUT With video signals the composite video VIDEO ZONE2 OUT and component video COMPONENT VIDEO ZONE2 OUT signals can be output but the S Video signal cannot be output ZONE3 Analog audio signals AUDIO ZONE3 OUT and digital audio signal OPTICAL ZONE3 SOURCE OUT With video signals the composite video VIDEO ZONES OUT signal can be output but the component video and S Video signals cannot be output a Any analog signal including the iPod signal With the MULTI CH IN input Sound is output only from the front L R channels 1 Selecting the HOME MEDIA GALLERY input for Zone 2 or Zone 3 may decrease the quality of the HOME MEDIA GALLERY picture in the main zone 2 You can t use sound controls such as the tone controls or Midnight listening or any surround modes with a separate amplifier in the sub zone You can however use the features available with your sub zone amplifier Other connections Basic MULTI ZONE setup ZONE 2 1 Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO ZONE2 OUT jacks and a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE2 OUT jacks
332. y high sampling rate up to 192 kHz PCM multichannel digital audio from DVD Audio and SACD discs as well as digital audio from DVD Video CD and Video CD discs all with a single cable e iPod Ready This amplifier is equipped with an iPod terminal allowing digital audio signal transfer Movies can be played on Video Browse compatible iPods Discover the benefits of registering your product online at http www pioneer co uk or http www pioneer eu PIONEER CORPORATION 4 1 Meguro 1 Chome Meguro ku Tokyo 153 8654 J apan PIONEER ELECTRONICS USA INC P O BOX 1540 Long Beach California 90801 1540 U S A TEL 800 421 1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA INC 300 Allstate Parkway Markham Ontario L3R OP2 Canada TEL 1 877 283 5901 905 479 4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087 Keetberglaan 1 B 9120 Melsele Belgium TEL 03 570 05 11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE LTD 253 Alexandra Road 04 01 Singapore 159936 TEL 65 6472 7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY LTD 178 184 Boundary Road Braeside Victoria 3195 Australia TEL 03 9586 6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S A DE C V Blvd Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col Lomas de Chapultepec Mexico D F 11000 TEL 55 9178 4270 K002 B_En Published by Pioneer Corporation Copyright 2008 Pioneer Corporation All rights reserved lt ARB7386 A gt Printed in
333. y not be removed or altered from any source or altered source distribution The Contributing Authors and Group 42 Inc specifically permit without fee and encourage the use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products If you use this source code in a product acknowledgment is not required but would be appreciated A png _get copyright function is available for convenient use in about boxes and the like printf s png_ get copyright NULL Also the PNG logo in PNG format of course is Supplied in the files pngbar png and pngbar jpg 88x31 and pngnow png 98x31 Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software OS Certified Open Source is a certification mark of the Open Source Initiative Glenn Randers Pehrson glennrp users sourceforge net September 12 2004 Copyright c 2002 Xiph org Foundation Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Additional information Neither the name of the Xiph org Foundation nor the names of i
334. y setting up for surround sound MCACC amp Full Band Phase Control on page 11 or Automatic MCACC Expert on page 40 En 06 The System Setup menu En Manual speaker setup This amplifier allows you to make detailed settings to optimize the surround sound performance You only need to make these settings once unless you change the placement of your current speaker system or add new speakers These settings are designed to customize your system but if you re satisfied with the settings made in Automatically setting up for surround sound WCACTC amp Full Band Phase Contro on page 11 it isn t necessary to make all of these settings Caution e The test tones used in the System Setup are output at high volume 1 Select Manual SP Setup then press ENTER 55 0dB DVD LD 6 Manual SP Setup 2 Output Setup 3 Manual MCACC 4 FULL BAND PHASE CTRL 5 Data Management 7 Input Setup 8 OSD Language 9 Other Setup b Channel Level c Speaker Distance d X Curve e THX Audio Setting Exit Return 2 Select the setting you want to adjust If you are doing this for the first time you may want to adjust these settings in order e Speaker Setting Specify the size and number of speakers you ve connected see below e Channel Level Adjust the overall balance of your speaker system page 53 e Speaker Distance Specify the distance of your speakers from the listening position p
335. you checked IP Address such as 192 168 201 Enter the same figures as used in the media server PC etc you use For enter 3 digit figures 0 254 that have not been used for network connections yet 5 Press ENTER on the setup item s box after the entry is complete The screen turns to setup selection mode Repeat steps 2 to 4 to complete the necessary setup 6 Select OK then ENTER A restart dialog screen appears 7 Press ENTER again on the dialog screen The setup finishes The system restarts then the Home Media Gallery screen returns Auto Connection Setup When you enjoy content on the network you can select from the following options Last Connected Server and Single Server USB See Auto Connection Setup on page 88 For USB content the Device List is displayed on the screen if you have not checked in the Single Server USB box after selecting Setup and then Auto Connection Setup You can select the desired device and then content in it If you have checked in the box the list is skipped default setting and you can see the folder s or file s in the USB device that has a single directory Default Settings Setups you have entered within the Home Media Gallery function return to default When you select Reset a confirmation screen To activate the default settings restart Home Media Gallery will appear Press ENTER to reset to default When you select Cancel the previous sc
336. you have also selected the display input to which you ve connected the amplifier in The nput Setup menu on page 94 2 To switch SR mode on off set the operation selector switch to AMP then press the SR button The front LCD display shows SR ON or SR OFF e The automatic video input switching and the automatic volume muting features are enabled separately see SR Setup for Pioneer plasma televisions on page 97 Note Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output When using the Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional see page 47 to calibrate the reverb characteristics of your listening room you can graphically check the results on your computer connected to this amplifier Also when the Full Band Phase Control function is activated you can visually check the calibrated characteristics of group delay of the speakers and the corrected characteristics of group delay processed by the exclusive correction filter by installing the corresponding PC application on your computer Use a commercially available RS 232C cable to connect the RS 232C jack on your computer to the 9 pin RS 232C jack on the back panel of this amplitier the cable must be cross type female female The software to output the results is available trom the Support area of the Pioneer website http www pioneer eu Instructions for using the software are also available here If you have any questions about the sofrware please contact the Pioneer Service Center

Operating Instructions SC -LX90 O perating Instruction s

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents